US20050171027A1 - Compositions for treating or preventing obesity and insulin resistance disorders - Google Patents

Compositions for treating or preventing obesity and insulin resistance disorders Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20050171027A1
US20050171027A1 US11/027,779 US2777904A US2005171027A1 US 20050171027 A1 US20050171027 A1 US 20050171027A1 US 2777904 A US2777904 A US 2777904A US 2005171027 A1 US2005171027 A1 US 2005171027A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
compound
sirtuin
agent
subject
cell
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/027,779
Inventor
David Sinclair
Maria Alexander-Bridges
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Harvard College
General Hospital Corp
Original Assignee
Harvard College
General Hospital Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Harvard College, General Hospital Corp filed Critical Harvard College
Priority to US11/027,779 priority Critical patent/US20050171027A1/en
Assigned to PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE reassignment PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: SINCLAIR, DAVID A.
Priority to US11/174,000 priority patent/US8017634B2/en
Publication of US20050171027A1 publication Critical patent/US20050171027A1/en
Assigned to GENERAL HOSPITAL CORPORATION, THE reassignment GENERAL HOSPITAL CORPORATION, THE ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ALEXANDER-BRIDGES, MARIA
Priority to US12/683,998 priority patent/US8242171B2/en
Priority to US13/192,011 priority patent/US8846724B2/en
Priority to US14/460,397 priority patent/US9597347B2/en
Priority to US15/424,759 priority patent/US20170216272A1/en
Assigned to NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (DHHS), U.S. GOVERNMENT reassignment NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (DHHS), U.S. GOVERNMENT CONFIRMATORY LICENSE (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: HARVARD UNIVERSITY
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/045—Hydroxy compounds, e.g. alcohols; Salts thereof, e.g. alcoholates
    • A61K31/05—Phenols
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/12—Ketones
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/35—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having six-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/352—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having six-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom condensed with carbocyclic rings, e.g. methantheline 
    • A61K31/353—3,4-Dihydrobenzopyrans, e.g. chroman, catechin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/48—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the pancreatic hormones
    • A61P5/50—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the pancreatic hormones for increasing or potentiating the activity of insulin

Definitions

  • Obesity is a chronic condition that is characterized by a body mass index (BMI) over 25. Both congenital and environmental factors, such as exercise and eating habits, contribute to the disease. For instance, the hormone leptin has been shown to be involved in fat accumulation and regulating eating behavior. Several animal models of obesity result from mutations in the leptin and/or leptin receptor gene. In addition to affecting the lifestyle of an individual, obesity can lead to a number of complications and diseases, including insulin resistance, Type II diabetes, gallbladder disease, hypertension, cardiovascular disease, hyperlipidemia, sleep apnea, coronary artery disease, knee osteoarthritis, gout, infertility, breast cancer, endometrial cancer, colon cancer and lower back pain.
  • BMI body mass index
  • Diabetes is a disease that shows an acute symptom due to a remarkably high blood sugar or ketoacidosis, or as well as chronic, general metabolic abnormalities arising from a prolonged high blood sugar status or a decrease in glucose tolerance. Both congenital and environmental factors, such as exercise and eating habits, contribute to the disease.
  • the pathogenic causes of diabetes are insulin productive disorders, secretion disorders or reductions in activities and sensitivities of the secreted insulin. Diabetes is largely grouped into the following two types: insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (also known as Type I diabetes) and non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (also known as Type II diabetes). The incidence of Type II diabetes is remarkably increased in obese patients.
  • Treatments for obesity are generally directed to suppressing the appetite of the subject. Whereas a number of appetite suppressants are available (diethylpropion tenuate, mazindol, orlistat, phendimetrazine, phentermine, sibutramine), these compounds may not be effective in all subjects or may be of limited efficacy. Accordingly, new treatments for obesity are needed.
  • a number of treatments for diabetes are well known and include oral hypoglycemic agents such as sulfonylureas that increase insulin secretion (for example, tolbutamide, chlorpropamide and glibenclamide), biguanides (for example, metformin and buformin) that increase glucose uptake and utilization and ⁇ -glucosidase inhibitors (for example, acarbose and voglibose).
  • thiazolidinediones such as troglitazone, rosiglitazone and pioglitazone, are used to ameliorate insulin-resistance.
  • thiazolidinedione intake is usually associated with a weight gain. Thus, there is a still a need for more effective therapies for diabetes.
  • the method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an agent that increases the activity and/or protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 or Sir2.
  • the agent may be a sirtuin-activating compound, or a salt or prodrug thereof.
  • the sirtuin-activating compound preferably stimulates human Sir2, i.e., SIRT1, protein activity.
  • the sirtuin-activating compound preferably is a compound, which has a formula selected from the group consisting of formulas 1-18 or a salt or prodrug thereof.
  • Sirtuin-activating compounds may be flavones, stilbenes, flavanones, isoflavones, catechins, chalcones, tannins and anthocyanidins or analogs or derivatives thereof.
  • Sirtuin-activating compounds may be selected from the group consisting of resveratrol, butein, piceatannol, isoliquiritgenin, fisetin, luteolin, 3,6,3′,4′-tetrahydroxyfalvone, quercetin, and analogs and derivatives thereof.
  • Preferred sirtuin activating compounds also increase the activity and/or protein level of 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase (AMPK).
  • AMPK 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase
  • the method further comprises administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a second agent that: (i) increases the activity and/or protein level of 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase (AMPK); (ii) increases the activity and/or protein level of a sirtuin; (iii) is an anti-diabetic agent; or (iv) is an anti-obesity agent.
  • AMPK 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase
  • sirtuin-inhibitory compounds are a compound selected from the group of compounds represented by formulas 19-21, or a salt or prodrug thereof.
  • Preferred sirtuin inhibitory compounds also decrease or inhibit the activity and/or protein level of 5′-AMP-activating protein kinase (AMPK).
  • AMPK 5′-AMP-activating protein kinase
  • the method further comprises administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a second agent that: (i) decreases the activity and/or protein level of a sirtuin; (ii) decreases the activity and/or protein level of 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase (AMPK); or (iii) is an agent for promoting weight gain.
  • a second agent that: (i) decreases the activity and/or protein level of a sirtuin; (ii) decreases the activity and/or protein level of 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase (AMPK); or (iii) is an agent for promoting weight gain.
  • sirtuin-activating compound alone or in conjunction with a second agent, for the manufacture of a medicament for treating or preventing an insulin resistance disorder
  • sirtuin inhibitory compound alone or in conjunction with a second agent, for the manufacture of a medicament for promoting weight gain in a subject.
  • FIG. 1 is a series of photomicrographs that depict the effect of the sirtuin-activating compound resveratrol at different concentrations to induce fat mobilization as indicated by a decrease in Nile Red staining.
  • FIG. 2 is a series of photomicrographs that depict the effect of resveratrol to induce fat mobilization in a mutant worm with disrupted insulin signaling.
  • FIG. 3 is a series of photomicrographs that depict the effect of the sirtuin-inhibiting compound nicotinamide on fat accumulation.
  • A. Resveratrol stimulates fat mobilization in wild type animals. Worms grown in the presence of vehicle alone, or 10 ⁇ M, 50 ⁇ M, and 100 ⁇ M resveratrol in vehicle were stained with Nile Red.
  • C Lower panel, Resveratrol and Nicotinamide have opposing effects on fat content. Effect of vehicle alone, resveratrol (25 ⁇ M), Nicotinamide (5 mM) or resveratrol 25 ⁇ M and Nicotinamide 5 mM in combination, on fat accumulation as assessed by Nile Red staining.
  • FIGS. 4 a - b is a series of photomicrographs that demonstrate fat content of C. elegans wild-type treated or not with Sir2.1 RNAi and incubated in the presence or absence of resveratrol.
  • FIG. 5A a-d represents a series of photomicrographs of C. elegans incubated with empty RNAi vector (panel a); AMPK RNAi (panel b); COT RNAi (panel c) and DAF-16 RNAi (panel d) in the presence or absence of resveratrol.
  • FIG. 5B represents the amount of Nile-Red staining in C. elegans shown in FIG. 5A .
  • FIG. 6 shows a Western Blot of proteins from C. elegans incubated in the presence or absence (control) of 500 ⁇ M AICAR, vehicle 2 (DMSO), 12.5 ⁇ M, 25 ⁇ M or 50 ⁇ M resveratrol and stained for the presence of AMPK, ACC, or tubulin.
  • FIG. 7 shows a Western Blot of proteins incubated in the presence or absence (control) of 500 ⁇ M AICAR, DMSO, 100 nM, 500 nM, 2.5 ⁇ M, 12.5 ⁇ M, 25 ⁇ M or 50 ⁇ M resveratrol and stained for the presence of P-ACC, P-AMPK, AMPK, or tubulin.
  • FIG. 8 is a Western Blot showing the phosphorylation of ACC in 3T3-L1 adipocytes treated either with ethanol or resveratrol and stained for the presence of P-ACC, SIRT1, or tubulin. In the lanes marked “SF”, cells were left in serum free media overnight before harvesting.
  • FIG. 9 is a Western Blot showing the phosphorylation of ACC in HEP3B human heptoma cells treated with either ethanol or resveratrol and stained for the presence of P-ACC, SIRT1, or tubulin. In the left lane, SIRT1 was knocked down. In the right four lanes, SIRT1 has been overexpressed.
  • FIG. 10 is a Western Blot of proteins from 3T3-L1 adipocytes infected with either a control (GFP) retrovirus, SIRT1, SIRT1 siRNA, or SIRT1 dominant negative (delta HY).
  • GFP control
  • SIRT1 siRNA siRNA
  • SIRT1 dominant negative delta HY
  • Cells were incubated in the presence of AICAR, ethanol, or resveratrol and stained for the presence of P-ACC, ACC, SIRT1, P-AMPK, AMPK, tubulin, or GAPDH.
  • a dose response curve is shown on the far right of the blot.
  • FIG. 11 is a Western Blot showing the effects of resveratrol in the presence or absence of AMPK kinase, LKB1.
  • Mouse embryonic fibroblasts were incubated in the presence of AICAR, ethanol, 50, 100, 200 ⁇ M of resveratrol. Blots were stained for the presence of P-ACC, P-AMPK, AMPK, or tubulin as indicated on the left.
  • FIG. 12 shows that resveratrol inhibits lipid accumulation during mammalian adipogenesis.
  • A. 3T3-L1 and NIH3T3 cells were differentiated into adipocytes in the presence of 25 ⁇ M, 12.5 ⁇ M or 0 ⁇ M resveratrol in vehicle (ethanol). After 10 days of differentiation, cells were fixed and stained with Oil red O. Oil red O was extracted from stained cells and quantified by measuring absorbance at 520 nm.
  • Oil red O quantitation is shown as fold change relative to the 3T3-L1 sample treated with 0 ⁇ m resvratrol.
  • FIG. 13 shows that resveratrol inhibits adipogenesis, and that this is rescued by PPAR ⁇ .
  • a marked decrease in PPAR ⁇ expression was detected in resveratrol-treated 3T3-L1 cells.
  • 3T3-L1 cells were grown in the presence of virus encoding gfp or PPAR-gamma and 25 ⁇ M, 12.5 ⁇ M or 0 ⁇ M resveratrol in vehicle (ethanol). After 8 days of differentiation, cells were fixed and stained with Oil red O.
  • FIG. 14 shows that resveratrol inhibits lipid accumulation and the partial rescue by deacetylase deficient SIRT1.
  • NIH3T3 cells were grown in the presence of virus encoding gfp, SIRT1 or deaceytlase deficient SIRT1.
  • Cells were differentiated into adipocytes in the presence of 25 ⁇ M, 12.5 ⁇ M or 0 ⁇ M resveratrol in vehicle (ethanol). After 8 days of differentiation, cells were fixed and stained with Oil red O. Oil red O was extracted from stained cells and quantified.
  • FIG. 15 shows the effect of polyphenols on C. elegans fat stores. C.
  • elegans in L1 were exposed to Nile Red stain and vehicle (A, 20% v/v DMSO in PBS buffer) or 100 ⁇ M resveratrol, butein, fisetin, piceatannol, or quercetin for 48 hours. In each image, the head is positioned towards the bottom.
  • FIG. 16 shows the effect of quercetin on C. elegans fat stores.
  • C. elegans in L1 were exposed to Nile Red and vehicle (20% v/v DMSO) or quercetin at 10 ⁇ M, 50 ⁇ M and 100 ⁇ M for 48 hours. In each image, the head is positioned towards the bottom.
  • FIG. 17 shows the effect of fisetin on C. elegans fat stores.
  • C. elegans in L1 stage were exposed to Nile Red and vehicle (A, 20% v/v DMSO) or fisetin at 10 ⁇ M, 50 ⁇ M and 100 ⁇ M for 48 hours. In each image, the head is positioned towards the bottom.
  • FIG. 18 shows the effect of 3,5-dihydroxy-4′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene on C. elegans fat stores.
  • Animals in L1 were treated with Nile Red stain and (A) 1% v/v DMSO or (B) 100 ⁇ M 3,5-dihydroxy-4′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene for 24 hours. In each image, the head is positioned towards the bottom.
  • FIG. 19 compares the effect of resveratrol and cis-stilbene (a resveratrol analogue) on C. elegans fat stores.
  • Animals in L1 were exposed to Nile Red stain and (A) 2.5% v/v DMSO, (B) 100 ⁇ M resveratrol or (C) cis-stilbene for 48 hours. In each image, the head is positioned towards the bottom.
  • FIG. 20 shows the effect of resveratrol on TNF-alpha treated adipocytes that are insulin resistant.
  • agent is used herein to denote a chemical compound, a mixture of chemical compounds, a biological macromolecule (such as a nucleic acid, an antibody, a protein or portion thereof, e.g., a peptide), or an extract made from biological materials such as bacteria, plants, fungi, or animal (particularly mammalian) cells or tissues.
  • a biological macromolecule such as a nucleic acid, an antibody, a protein or portion thereof, e.g., a peptide
  • an extract made from biological materials such as bacteria, plants, fungi, or animal (particularly mammalian) cells or tissues.
  • the activity of such agents may render it suitable as a “therapeutic agent” which is a biologically, physiologically, or pharmacologically active substance (or substances) that acts locally or systemically in a subject.
  • sirtuin activation refers to increasing at least one activity of a sirtuin protein, preferably by at least about 10%, 50%, 100% or more.
  • Activating a sirtuin protein refers to the action of producing an activated sirtuin protein, i.e., a sirtuin protein that is capable of performing at least one of its biological activities with an increase of activity of at least about 10%, 50%, 2 fold or more.
  • Biological activities of sirtuin proteins include deacetylation, e.g., of histones and p53; extending lifespan; increasing genomic stability; silencing transcription; and controlling the segregation of oxidized proteins between mother and daughter cells.
  • an “activating compound,” “sirtuin-activating compound,” or a “sirtuin activator” refers to a compound that activates a sirtuin protein or stimulates or increases at least one activity of a sirtuin protein.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound may have a formula selected from the group of formulas 1-18.
  • sirtuin inhibition refers to decreasing at least one activity of a sirtuin protein, preferably at least about 10%, 50%, 100% or more.
  • an “inhibitory compound” or “inhibiting compound” or “sirtuin inhibitory compound” refers to a compound that inhibits at least one activity of a sirtuin protein.
  • a sirtuin inhibitory compound may have a formula selected from the group consisting of formulas 19-21.
  • a “form that is naturally occurring” when referring to a compound means a compound that is in a form, e.g., a composition, in which it can be found naturally. For example, since resveratrol can be found in red wine, it is present in red wine in a form that is naturally occurring. A compound is not in a form that is naturally occurring if, e.g., the compound has been purified and separated from at least some of the other molecules that are found with the compound in nature.
  • a “naturally occurring compound” refers to a compound that can be found in nature, i.e., a compound that has not been designed by man. A naturally occurring compound may have been made by man or by nature.
  • “Sirtuin protein” refers to a member of the sirtuin deacetylase protein family or preferably to the Sir2 family, which include yeast Sir2 (GenBank Accession No. P53685), C. elegans Sir-2.1 (GenBank Accession No. NP — 501912), and human SIRT1 (GenBank Accession No. NM — 012238 and NP — 036370 (or AF083106), set forth as SEQ ID NOs: 1 and 2, respectively) and SIRT2 (GenBank Accession No. NM — 030593 and AF083107) proteins.
  • HST genes additional yeast Sir2-like genes termed “HST genes” (homologues of Sir two) HST1, HST2, HST3 and HST4, and the five other human homologues hSIRT3, hSIRT4, hSIRT5, hSIRT6 and hSIRT7 (Brachmann et al. (1995) Genes Dev. 9: 2888 and Frye et al. (1999) BBRC 260: 273).
  • HST genes homologues of Sir two HST1, HST2, HST3 and HST4
  • Preferred sirtuins are those that share more similarities with SIRT1, i.e., hSIRT1, and/or Sir2 than with SIRT2, such as those members having at least part of the N-terminal sequence present in SIRT1 and absent in SIRT2 such as SIRT3 has.
  • a “direct activator” of a sirtuin is a molecule that activates a sirtuin by binding to it.
  • a “direct inhibitor” of a sirtuin is a molecule that inhibits a sirtuin by binding to it.
  • Diabetes refers to high blood sugar or ketoacidosis, as well as chronic, general metabolic abnormalities arising from a prolonged high blood sugar status or a decrease in glucose tolerance. “Diabetes” encompasses both the type I and type II (Non Insulin Dependent Diabetes Mellitus or NIDDM) forms of the disease.
  • the risk factors for diabetes include the following factors: waistline of more than 40 inches for men or 35 inches for women, blood pressure of 130/85 mmHg or higher, triglycerides above 150 mg/dl, fasting blood glucose greater than 100 mg/dl or high-density lipoprotein of less than 40 mg/dl in men or 50 mg/dl in women.
  • hyperinsulinemia refers to a state in an individual in which the level of insulin in the blood is higher than normal.
  • insulin resistance refers to a state in which a normal amount of insulin produces a subnormal biologic response relative to the biological response in a subject that does not have insulin resistance.
  • insulin resistance disorder refers to any disease or condition that is caused by or contributed to by insulin resistance. Examples include: diabetes, obesity, metabolic syndrome, insulin-resistance syndromes, syndrome X, insulin resistance, high blood pressure, hypertension, high blood cholesterol, dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, atherosclerotic disease including stroke, coronary artery disease or myocardial infarction, hyperglycemia, hyperinsulinemia and/or hyperproinsulinemia, impaired glucose tolerance, delayed insulin release, diabetic complications, including coronary heart disease, angina pectoris, congestive heart failure, stroke, cognitive functions in dementia, retinopathy, peripheral neuropathy, nephropathy, glomerulonephritis, glomerulosclerosis, nephrotic syndrome, hypertensive nephrosclerosis some types of cancer (such as endometrial, breast, prostate, and colon), complications of pregnancy, poor female reproductive health (such as menstrual irregularities, infertility, irregular ovulation, poly
  • Obese individuals or individuals suffering from obesity are generally individuals having a body mass index (BMI) of at least 25 or greater. Obesity may or may not be associated with insulin resistance.
  • BMI body mass index
  • percent identical refers to sequence identity between two amino acid sequences or between two nucleotide sequences. Identity can each be determined by comparing a position in each sequence which may be aligned for purposes of comparison. When an equivalent position in the compared sequences is occupied by the same base or amino acid, then the molecules are identical at that position; when the equivalent site occupied by the same or a similar amino acid residue (e.g., similar in steric and/or electronic nature), then the molecules can be referred to as homologous (similar) at that position.
  • Expression as a percentage of homology, similarity, or identity refers to a function of the number of identical or similar amino acids at positions shared by the compared sequences.
  • FASTA FASTA
  • BLAST BLAST
  • ENTREZ is available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information, National Library of Medicine, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md.
  • the percent identity of two sequences can be determined by the GCG program with a gap weight of 1, e.g., each amino acid gap is weighted as if it were a single amino acid or nucleotide mismatch between the two sequences.
  • MPSRCH uses a Smith-Waterman algorithm to score sequences on a massively parallel computer. This approach improves ability to pick up distantly related matches, and is especially tolerant of small gaps and nucleotide sequence errors. Nucleic acid-encoded amino acid sequences can be used to search both protein and DNA databases.
  • polynucleotide and “nucleic acid” are used interchangeably. They refer to a polymeric form of nucleotides of any length, either deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or analogs thereof. Polynucleotides may have any three-dimensional structure, and may perform any function, known or unknown.
  • polynucleotides coding or non-coding regions of a gene or gene fragment, loci (locus) defined from linkage analysis, exons, introns, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant polynucleotides, branched polynucleotides, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers.
  • a polynucleotide may comprise modified nucleotides, such as methylated nucleotides and nucleotide analogs.
  • modifications to the nucleotide structure may be imparted before or after assembly of the polymer.
  • the sequence of nucleotides may be interrupted by non-nucleotide components.
  • a polynucleotide may be further modified, such as by conjugation with a labeling component.
  • the term “recombinant” polynucleotide means a polynucleotide of genomic, cDNA, semisynthetic, or synthetic origin which either does not occur in nature or is linked to another polynucleotide in a nonnatural arrangement.
  • a “patient,” “individual,” “subject” or “host” refers to either a human or a non-human animal.
  • substantially homologous when used in connection with amino acid sequences, refers to sequences which are substantially identical to or similar in sequence with each other, giving rise to a homology of conformation and thus to retention, to a useful degree, of one or more biological (including immunological) activities. The term is not intended to imply a common evolution of the sequences.
  • modulation is art-recognized and refers to regulation (i.e., activation or stimulation), down regulation (i.e., inhibition or suppression) of a response, or the two in combination or apart.
  • prophylactic or therapeutic treatment refers to administration of a drug to a host. If it is administered prior to clinical manifestation of the unwanted condition (e.g., disease or other unwanted state of the host animal) then the treatment is prophylactic, i.e., it protects the host against developing the unwanted condition, whereas if administered after manifestation of the unwanted condition, the treatment is therapeutic (i.e., it is intended to diminish, ameliorate or maintain the existing unwanted condition or side effects therefrom).
  • the unwanted condition e.g., disease or other unwanted state of the host animal
  • mammals include humans, primates, bovines, porcines, canines, felines, and rodents (e.g., mice and rats).
  • bioavailable when referring to a compound is art-recognized and refers to a form of a compound that allows for it, or a portion of the amount of compound administered, to be absorbed by, incorporated to, or otherwise physiologically available to a subject or patient to whom it is administered.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable salt refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of compounds, including, for example, those contained in compositions described herein.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier refers to a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting any subject composition or component thereof from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
  • a pharmaceutically-acceptable material such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting any subject composition or component thereof from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
  • Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the subject composition and its components and not injurious to the patient.
  • materials which may serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed o il, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydro
  • systemic administration refers to the administration of a subject composition, therapeutic or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes.
  • parenteral administration and “administered parenterally” are art-recognized and refer to modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intra-articulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, and intrasternal injection and infusion.
  • Transcriptional regulatory sequence is a generic term used throughout the specification to refer to DNA sequences, such as initiation signals, enhancers, and promoters, which induce or control transcription of protein coding sequences with which they are operable linked.
  • transcription of one of the recombinant genes is under the control of a promoter sequence (or other transcriptional regulatory sequence) which controls the expression of the recombinant gene in a cell-type which expression is intended.
  • a promoter sequence or other transcriptional regulatory sequence
  • the recombinant gene can be under the control of transcriptional regulatory sequences which are the same or which are different from those sequences which control transcription of the naturally-occurring forms of genes as described herein.
  • a “vector” is a self-replicating nucleic acid molecule that transfers an inserted nucleic acid molecule into and/or between host cells.
  • the term includes vectors that function primarily for insertion of a nucleic acid molecule into a cell, replication of vectors that function primarily for the replication of nucleic acid, and expression vectors that function for transcription and/or translation of the DNA or RNA. Also included are vectors that provide more than one of the above functions.
  • expression vectors are defined as polynucleotides which, when introduced into an appropriate host cell, can be transcribed and translated into a polypeptide(s).
  • An “expression system” usually connotes a suitable host cell comprised of an expression vector that can function to yield a desired expression product.
  • Treating” a condition or disease refers to curing as well as ameliorating at least one symptom of the condition or disease.
  • C is art-recognized and refers to the arrangement of two atoms or groups around a double bond such that the atoms or groups are on the same side of the double bond.
  • C is configurations are often labeled as (Z) configurations.
  • Trans is art-recognized and refers to the arrangement of two atoms or groups around a double bond such that the atoms or groups are on the opposite sides of a double bond.
  • Trans configurations are often labeled as (E) configurations.
  • covalent bond is art-recognized and refers to a bond between two atoms where electrons are attracted electrostatically to both nuclei of the two atoms, and the net effect of increased electron density between the nuclei counterbalances the internuclear repulsion.
  • covalent bond includes coordinate bonds when the bond is with a metal ion.
  • therapeutic agent is art-recognized and refers to any chemical moiety that is a biologically, physiologically, or pharmacologically active substance that acts locally or systemically in a subject.
  • the term also means any substance intended for use in the diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment or prevention of disease or in the enhancement of desirable physical or mental development and/or conditions in an animal or human.
  • therapeutic effect is art-recognized and refers to a local or systemic effect in animals, particularly mammals, and more particularly humans caused by a pharmacologically active substance.
  • therapeutically-effective amount means that amount of such a substance that produces some desired local or systemic effect at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any treatment.
  • the therapeutically effective amount of such substance will vary depending upon the subject and disease or condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease or condition, the manner of administration and the like, which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • certain compositions described herein may be administered in a sufficient amount to produce a desired effect at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to such treatment.
  • synthetic is art-recognized and refers to production by in vitro chemical or enzymatic synthesis.
  • meso compound is art-recognized and refers to a chemical compound which has at least two chiral centers but is achiral due to a plane or point of symmetry.
  • chiral is art-recognized and refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.
  • a “prochiral molecule” is a molecule which has the potential to be converted to a chiral molecule in a particular process.
  • stereoisomers is art-recognized and refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space.
  • enantiomers refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposable mirror images of one another.
  • Diastereomers refers to stereoisomers with two or more centers of dissymmetry and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another.
  • a “stereoselective process” is one which produces a particular stereoisomer of a reaction product in preference to other possible stereoisomers of that product.
  • An “enantioselective process” is one which favors production of one of the two possible enantiomers of a reaction product.
  • regioisomers is art-recognized and refers to compounds which have the same molecular formula but differ in the connectivity of the atoms. Accordingly, a “regioselective process” is one which favors the production of a particular regioisomer over others, e.g., the reaction produces a statistically significant increase in the yield of a certain regioisomer.
  • esters are art-recognized and refers to molecules with identical chemical constitution and containing more than one stereocenter, but which differ in configuration at only one of these stereocenters.
  • ED 50 means the dose of a drug which produces 50% of its maximum response or effect, or alternatively, the dose which produces a pre-determined response in 50% of test subjects or preparations.
  • LD 50 means the dose of a drug which is lethal in 50% of test subjects.
  • therapeutic index is an art-recognized term which refers to the therapeutic index of a drug, defined as LD 50 /ED 50 .
  • structure-activity relationship or “(SAR)” is art-recognized and refers to the way in which altering the molecular structure of a drug or other compound alters its biological activity, e.g., its interaction with a receptor, enzyme, nucleic acid or other target and the like.
  • aliphatic is art-recognized and refers to a linear, branched, cyclic alkane, alkene, or alkyne.
  • aliphatic groups in the present compounds are linear or branched and have from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl is art-recognized, and includes saturated aliphatic groups, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups.
  • a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has about 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C 1 -C 30 for straight chain, C 3 -C 30 for branched chain), and alternatively, about 20 or fewer.
  • cycloalkyls have from about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and alternatively about 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure.
  • alkyl is also defined to include halosubstituted alkyls.
  • aralkyl is art-recognized and refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group (e.g., an aromatic or heteroaromatic group).
  • alkenyl and alkynyl are art-recognized and refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
  • lower alkyl refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, but having from one to about ten carbons, alternatively from one to about six carbon atoms in its backbone structure.
  • lower alkenyl and “lower alkynyl” have similar chain lengths.
  • heteroatom is art-recognized and refers to an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen.
  • Illustrative heteroatoms include boron, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, sulfur and selenium.
  • aryl is art-recognized and refers to 5-, 6- and 7-membered single-ring aromatic groups that may include from zero to four heteroatoms, for example, benzene, naphtalene, anthracene, pyrene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like.
  • aryl groups having heteroatoms in the ring structure may also be referred to as “aryl heterocycles” or “heteroaromatics.”
  • the aromatic ring may be substituted at one or more ring positions with such substituents as described above, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aromatic or heteroaromatic moieties, —CF 3 , —CN, or the like.
  • aryl also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings (the rings are “fused rings”) wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings may be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls.
  • ortho, meta and para are art-recognized and refer to 1,2-, 1,3- and 1,4-disubstituted benzenes, respectively.
  • 1,2-dimethylbenzene and ortho-dimethylbenzene are synonymous.
  • heterocyclyl or “heterocyclic group” are art-recognized and refer to 3- to about 10-membered ring structures, alternatively 3- to about 7-membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. Heterocycles may also be polycycles.
  • Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, thiophene, thianthrene, furan, pyran, isobenzofuran, chromene, xanthene, phenoxanthene, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, pyrimidine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phenarsazine, phenothiazine, furazan, phenoxazine, pyrrolidine, o
  • the heterocyclic ring may be substituted at one or more positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, —CF 3 , —CN, or the like.
  • substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxy
  • polycyclyl or “polycyclic group” are art-recognized and refer to two or more rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are “fused rings”. Rings that are joined through non-adjacent atoms are termed “bridged” rings.
  • Each of the rings of the polycycle may be substituted with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, —CF 3 , —CN, or the like.
  • substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, si
  • carrier is art-recognized and refers to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring in which each atom of the ring is carbon.
  • nitro is art-recognized and refers to —NO 2 ;
  • halogen is art-recognized and refers to —F, —Cl, —Br or —I;
  • sulfhydryl is art-recognized and refers to —SH;
  • hydroxyl means —OH;
  • sulfonyl is art-recognized and refers to —SO 2 ⁇ .
  • Halide designates the corresponding anion of the halogens, and “pseudohalide” has the definition set forth on 560 of “ Advanced Inorganic Chemistry” by Cotton and Wilkinson.
  • amine and “amino” are art-recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines, e.g., a moiety that may be represented by the general formulas:
  • acylamino is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula: wherein R50 is as defined above, and R54 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or —(CH 2 ) m —R61, where m and R61 are as defined above.
  • amide is art recognized as an amino-substituted carbonyl and includes a moiety that may be represented by the general formula: wherein R50 and R51 are as defined above. Certain embodiments of amides may not include imides which may be unstable.
  • alkylthio refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfur radical attached thereto.
  • the “alkylthio” moiety is represented by one of —S-alkyl, —S-alkenyl, —S-alkynyl, and —S—(CH 2 ) m —R61, wherein m and R61 are defined above.
  • Representative alkylthio groups include methylthio, ethyl thio, and the like.
  • carbonyl is art recognized and includes such moieties as may be represented by the general formulas: wherein X50 is a bond or represents an oxygen or a sulfur, and R55 and R56 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, —(CH 2 ) m —R61 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, R56 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or —(CH 2 ) m —R 61 , where m and R61 are defined above. Where X50 is an oxygen and R55 or R56 is not hydrogen, the formula represents an “ester”.
  • X50 is an oxygen
  • R55 is as defined above
  • the moiety is referred to herein as a carboxyl group, and particularly when R55 is a hydrogen, the formula represents a “carboxylic acid”.
  • X50 is an oxygen
  • R56 is hydrogen
  • the formula represents a “formate”.
  • the oxygen atom of the above formula is replaced by sulfur
  • the formula represents a “thiolcarbonyl” group.
  • X50 is a sulfur and R55 or R56 is not hydrogen
  • the formula represents a “thiolester.”
  • X50 is a sulfur and R55 is hydrogen
  • the formula represents a “thiolcarboxylic acid.”
  • X50 is a sulfur and R56 is hydrogen
  • the formula represents a “thiolformate.”
  • X50 is a bond, and R55 is not hydrogen
  • the above formula represents a “ketone” group.
  • X50 is a bond, and R55 is hydrogen
  • the above formula represents an “aldehyde” group.
  • alkoxyl or “alkoxy” are art-recognized and refer to an alkyl group, as defined above, having an oxygen radical attached thereto.
  • Representative alkoxyl groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, tert-butoxy and the like.
  • An “ether” is two hydrocarbons covalently linked by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an alkyl that renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an alkoxyl, such as may be represented by one of —O-alkyl, —O-alkenyl, —O-alkynyl, —O—(CH 2 ) m —R61, where m and R61 are described above.
  • sulfonate is art recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula: in which R57 is an electron pair, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or aryl.
  • sulfonamido is art recognized and includes a moiety that may be represented by the general formula: in which R50 and R56 are as defined above.
  • sulfamoyl is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula: in which R50 and R51 are as defined above.
  • sulfonyl is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula: in which R58 is one of the following: hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl.
  • sulfoxido is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula: in which R58 is defined above.
  • phosphoryl is art-recognized and may in general be represented by the formula: wherein Q50 represents S or O, and R59 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl or an aryl.
  • the phosphoryl group of the phosphorylalkyl may be represented by the general formulas: wherein Q50 and R59, each independently, are defined above, and Q51 represents O, S or N.
  • Q50 is S
  • the phosphoryl moiety is a “phosphorothioate”.
  • phosphonamidite is art-recognized and may be represented in the general formulas: wherein Q51, R50, R51 and R59 are as defined above, and R60 represents a lower alkyl or an aryl.
  • Analogous substitutions may be made to alkenyl and alkynyl groups to produce, for example, aminoalkenyls, aminoalkynyls, amidoalkenyls, amidoalkynyls, iminoalkenyls, iminoalkynyls, thioalkenyls, thioalkynyls, carbonyl-substituted alkenyls or alkynyls.
  • the definition of each expression e.g. alkyl, m, n, and the like, when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure.
  • selenoalkyl is art-recognized and refers to an alkyl group having a substituted seleno group attached thereto.
  • exemplary “selenoethers” which may be substituted on the alkyl are selected from one of —Se-alkyl, —Se-alkenyl, —Se-alkynyl, and —Se—(CH 2 ) m —R61, m and R61 being defined above.
  • triflyl, tosyl, mesyl, and nonaflyl are art-recognized and refer to trifluoromethanesulfonyl, p-toluenesulfonyl, methanesulfonyl, and nonafluorobutanesulfonyl groups, respectively.
  • triflate, tosylate, mesylate, and nonaflate are art-recognized and refer to trifluoromethanesulfonate ester, p-toluenesulfonate ester, methanesulfonate ester, and nonafluorobutanesulfonate ester functional groups and molecules that contain said groups, respectively.
  • Me, Et, Ph, Tf, Nf, Ts, and Ms represent methyl, ethyl, phenyl, trifluoromethanesulfonyl, nonafluorobutanesulfonyl, p-toluenesulfonyl and methanesulfonyl, respectively.
  • a more comprehensive list of the abbreviations utilized by organic chemists of ordinary skill in the art appears in the first issue of each volume of the Journal of Organic Chemistry ; this list is typically presented in a table entitled Standard List of Abbreviations.
  • compositions described herein may exist in particular geometric or stereoisomeric forms.
  • compounds may also be optically active. Contemplated herein are all such compounds, including cis- and trans-isomers, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, (D)-isomers, (L)-isomers, the racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof. Additional asymmetric carbon atoms may be present in a substituent such as an alkyl group. All such isomers, as well as mixtures thereof, are encompassed herein.
  • a particular enantiomer of a compound may be prepared by asymmetric synthesis, or by derivation with a chiral auxiliary, where the resulting diastereomeric mixture is separated and the auxiliary group cleaved to provide the pure desired enantiomers.
  • the molecule contains a basic functional group, such as amino, or an acidic functional group, such as carboxyl, diastereomeric salts are formed with an appropriate optically-active acid or base, followed by resolution of the diastereomers thus formed by fractional crystallization or chromatographic means well known in the art, and subsequent recovery of the pure enantiomers.
  • substitution or “substituted with” includes the implicit proviso that such substitution i s in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction.
  • substituted is also contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds.
  • the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds.
  • Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described herein above.
  • the permissible substituents may be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds.
  • Heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms.
  • Compounds are not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds.
  • protecting group is art-recognized and refers to temporary substituents that protect a potentially reactive functional group from undesired chemical transformations.
  • protecting groups include esters of carboxylic acids, silyl ethers of alcohols, and acetals and ketals of aldehydes and ketones, respectively.
  • the field of protecting group chemistry has been reviewed by Greene and Wuts in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2 nd ed., Wiley: New York, 1991).
  • hydroxyl-protecting group refers to those groups intended to protect a hydrozyl group against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures and includes, for example, benzyl or other suitable esters or ethers groups known in the art.
  • carboxyl-protecting group refers to those groups intended to protect a carboxylic acid group, such as the C-terminus of an amino acid or peptide or an acidic or hydroxyl azepine ring substituent, against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures and includes.
  • Examples for protecting groups for carboxyl groups involve, for example, benzyl ester, cyclohexyl ester, 4-nitrobenzyl ester, t-butyl ester, 4-pyridylmethyl ester, and the like.
  • amino-blocking group refers to a group which will prevent an amino group from participating in a reaction carried out on some other functional group, but which can be removed from the amine when desired.
  • amino-blocking group refers to a group which will prevent an amino group from participating in a reaction carried out on some other functional group, but which can be removed from the amine when desired.
  • Such groups are discussed by in Ch. 7 of Greene and Wuts, cited above, and by Barton, Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry ch. 2 (McOmie, ed., Plenum Press, New York, 1973).
  • acyl protecting groups such as, to illustrate, formyl, dansyl, acetyl, benzoyl, trifluoroacetyl, succinyl, methoxysuccinyl, benzyl and substituted benzyl such as 3,4-dimethoxybenzyl, o-nitrobenzyl, and triphenylmethyl; those of the formula —COOR where R includes such groups as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, 1-methyl-1-phenylethyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, t-amyl, vinyl, allyl, phenyl, benzyl, p-nitrobenzyl, o-nitrobenzyl, and 2,4-dichlorobenzyl; acyl groups and substituted acyl such as formyl, acetyl, chloroacetyl, dichloroacetyl,
  • Preferred amino-blocking groups are benzyl (—CH 2 C 6 H 5 ), acyl [C(O)R1] or SiR1 3 where R1 is C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halomethyl, or 2-halo-substituted-(C 2 -C 4 alkoxy), aromatic urethane protecting groups as, for example, carbonylbenzyloxy (Cbz); and aliphatic urethane protecting groups such as t-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc) or 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (FMOC).
  • each expression e.g. lower alkyl, m, n, p and the like, when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure.
  • electron-withdrawing group is art-recognized, and refers to the tendency of a substituent to attract valence electrons from neighboring atoms, i.e., the substituent is electronegative with respect to neighboring atoms.
  • ⁇ Hammett sigma
  • Exemplary electron-withdrawing groups include nitro, acyl, formyl, sulfonyl, trifluoromethyl, cyano, chloride, and the like.
  • Exemplary electron-donating groups include amino, methoxy, and the like.
  • activators of sirtuins such as resveratrol, butein, fisetin, piceatannol, quercetin and 3,5-dihydroxy-4-′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene stimulates fat metabolism by reducing fat accumulation (See examples 1, 8 and 9) as well as inhibit adipogenesis (example 6); that Sir2 and AMPK are necessary for resveratrol mediated fat mobilization (See examples 3 and 4); that resveratrol stimulates AMPK and ACC phosphorylation (See example 5); that resveratrol boosts insulin sensitivity of adipocytes (See example 10) and that resveratrol, like other AMPK activators, can stimulate fatty acid oxidation in lipogenic cells (See example 11).
  • sirtuins such as resveratrol, butein, fisetin, piceatannol, quercetin and 3,5-dihydroxy-4-′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene stimulates fat metabolism by reducing fat accumulation (
  • sirtuin-activating compounds that activate sirtuins are described in Howitz et al. (2003) Nature 425: 191 and include: for example, resveratrol (3,5,4′-Trihydroxy-trans-stilbene), butein (3,4,2′,4′-Tetrahydroxychalcone), piceatannol (3,5,3′,4′-Tetrahydroxy-trans-stilbene), isoliquiritigenin (4,2′,4′-Trihydroxychalcone), fisetin (3,7,3′,4′-Tetrahyddroxyflavone), quercetin (3,5,7,3′,4′-Pentahydroxyflavone), Deoxyrhapontin (3,5-Dihydroxy-4′-methoxystilbene 3-O- ⁇ -D-glucoside); trans-Stilbene; Rhapontin (3,3′,5-Trihydroxy-4′-methoxystilbene 3-O- ⁇ -D-glucoside); cis-Stilbene
  • sirtuin-activating compounds may have any of formulas 1-18 below.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound is a stilbene or chalcone compound of formula 1: wherein, independently for each occurrence,
  • the compound is a compound as shown as of formula 1 with attendant definitions, wherein the n is 0. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein the n is 1. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein the A-B is ethenyl. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein the A-B is —CH 2 CH(Me)CH(Me)CH 2 —. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein the M is 0.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein the R 3 , R 5 , R′ 2 and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 1 , R 3 , R 5 , R′ 2 and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 and R′ 2 are OH; R 4 is O- ⁇ -D-glucoside; and R′ 3 is OCH 3 .
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 is OH; R 4 is O- ⁇ -D-glucoside; and R′ 3 is OCH 3 .
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is ethenyl; and R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (trans stilbene).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1; A-B is ethenyl; M is O; and R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (chalcone).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is ethenyl; R 2 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R 5 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (resveratrol).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is ethenyl; R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R 5 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 and R′ 5 are H (piceatannol).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1; A-B is ethenyl; M is O; R 3 , R 5 , R′ 2 and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (butein).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1; A-B is ethenyl; M is O; R 1 , R 3 , R 5 , R′ 2 and R′ 3 are OH; and R 2 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (3,4,2′,4′,6′-pentahydroxychalcone).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is ethenyl; R 2 and R′ 2 are OH, R 4 is O- ⁇ -D-glucoside, R′ 3 is OCH 3 ; and R 1 , R 3 , R 5 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (rhapontin).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is ethenyl; R 2 is OH, R 4 is O- ⁇ -D-glucoside, R′ 3 is OCH 3 ; and R 1 , R 3 , R 5 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (deoxyrhapontin).
  • a compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is —CH 2 CH(Me)CH(Me)CH 2 —; R 2 , R 3 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 4 , R 5 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (NDGA).
  • a sirtuin-activating compound is a flavanone compound of formula 2: wherein, independently for each occurrence,
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are both CH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is O.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is H 2 .
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein Z is O.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R′′ is H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R′′ is OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R′′ is an ester.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R1 is In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , R′ 5 and R′′ are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 4 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′′ are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′′ are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′′ are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is O; Z and 0; R′′ is H; and R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , R′ 5 and R′′ are H (flavanone).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is O; Z and O; R′′ is H; R 2 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (naringenin).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is O; Z and O; R′′ is OH; R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (3,5,7,3′,4′-pentahydroxyflavanone).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is H 2 ; Z and O; R′′ is OH; R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 , are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 and R′ 5 are H (epicatechin).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is H 2 ; Z and O; R′′ is OH; R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , and R′ 5 are H (gallocatechin).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is H 2 ; Z and O; R′′ is R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′′ are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , and R′ 5 are H (epigallocatechin gallate).
  • a sirtuin-activating compound is an iso flavanone compound of formula 3:
  • a sirtuin-activating compound is a flavone compound of formula 4:
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CR. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein Z is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R′′ is H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R′′ is OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound of formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 3 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 3 , R′ 1 , and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 1 , R 2 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 3 , R′ 1 , and R′ 2 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R′ 3 is OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 4 and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 and R 4 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , R′ 1 , and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 4 is OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown ds formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; and R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (flavone).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (fisetin).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , and R's are H (5,7,3′,4′,5′-pentahydroxyflavone).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (luteolin).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C, R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 3 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (3,6,3′,4′-tetrahydroxyflavone).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C, R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H (quercetin).
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R 4 , R′ 1 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R1, R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 3 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C, R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 3 , R′ 1 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein A is CH, R′′ is absent, Z is O, M is O; R 2 and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C, R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 1 , R 2 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 3 , R′ 1 , and R′ 2 are OH; and R 1 , R 2 , R4; R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R′ 3 is OH; and R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R 4 and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R 2 and R 4 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R 4 , R′ 1 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R 4 is OH; and R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R′ 2 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R 4 , R′ 1 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R′′ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound is an iso flavone compound of formula 5:
  • Y represents CR or N when R′′ is absent or C when R′′ is present.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein Y is CR. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein Y is CH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein Z is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound of formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein Y is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R 2 and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein Y is CH; R′′ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R 2 , R 4 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound is an anthocyanidin compound of formula 6:
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein A ⁇ is Cl ⁇ .
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 3 , R 5 , R 7 , and R′ 4 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 3 , R 5 , R 7 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 3 , R 5 , R 7 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein A ⁇ is Cl ⁇ ; R 3 , R 5 , R 7 , and R′ 4 are OH; and R 4 , R6, R8, R′ 2 , R′ 3 , R′ 5 , and R′ 6 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein A ⁇ is Cl ⁇ ; R 3 , R 5 , R 7 , R′ 3 , and R′ 4 are OH; and R 4 , R6, R8, R′ 2 , R′ 5 , and R′ 6 are H.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein A ⁇ is Cl ⁇ ; R 3 , R 5 , R 7 , R′ 3 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are OH; and R 4 , R 6 , R 8 , R′ 2 , and R′ 6 are H.
  • Methods for activating a sirtuin protein family member may also comprise contacting the cell with a stilbene, chalcone, or flavone compound represented by formula 7:
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is absent. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R a is H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is O and the two R a form a bond.
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 5 is H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 5 is OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 1 , R 3 , and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R 2 and
  • the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; M is absent; R a is H; R 5 is H; R 1 , R 3 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 2 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R 2 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are OH.
  • the compound is a compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1; M is absent; R a is H; R 5 is H; R 2 , R 4 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • the activating compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1; M is O; the two R a form a bond; R 5 is OH; R 2 , R′ 2 , and R′ 3 are OH; and R 1 , R 3 , R 4 , R′ 1 , R′ 4 , and R′ 5 are H.
  • sirtuin-activating compounds include compounds having a formula selected from the group consisting of formulas 8-10 set forth below.
  • exemplary sirtuin-activating compounds are isonicotinamide analogs, such as, for example, the isonicotinamide analogs described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,985,848; 6,066,722; 6,228,847; 6,492,347; 6,803,455; and U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2001/0019823; 2002/0061898; 2002/0132783; 2003/0149261; 2003/0229033; 2003/0096830; 2004/0053944; 2004/0110772; and 2004/0181063, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • sirtuin-activating compounds may be an isonicotinamide analog having any of formulas 11-14 below.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound is an isonicotinamide analog compound of formula 11:
  • A is a nitrogen-, oxygen-, or sulfur-linked aryl, alkyl, cyclic, or heterocyclic group.
  • the A moieties thus described optionally have leaving group characteristics.
  • A is further substituted with an electron contributing moiety.
  • B and C are both hydrogen, or one of B or C is a halogen, amino, or thiol group and the other of B or C is hydrogen; and D is a primary alcohol, a hydrogen, or an oxygen, nitrogen, carbon, or sulfur linked to phosphate, a phosphoryl group, a pyrophosphoryl group, or adenosine monophosphate through a phosphodiester or carbon-, nitrogen-, or sulfur-substituted phosphodiester bridge, or to adenosine diphosphate through a phosphodiester or carbon-, nitrogen-, or sulfur-substituted pyrophosphodiester bridge.
  • A is a substituted N-linked aryl or heterocyclic group, an O-linked aryl or heterocyclic group having the formula —O—Y, or an S-linked aryl or heterocyclic group having the formula —O—Y; both B and C are hydrogen, or one of B or C is a halogen, amino, or thiol group and the other of B or C is hydrogen; and D is a primary alcohol or hydrogen.
  • each R is H or an electron-contributing moiety and Z is an alkyl, aryl, hydroxyl, OZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, amino, NHZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, or NHZ′Z′′ where Z′ and Z′′ are independently an alkyl or aryl.
  • Examples of A include i-xiv below:
  • Examples of Y include, but are not limited to, xv-xxvii below:
  • X is halogen, thiol, or substituted thiol, amino or substituted amino, oxygen or substituted oxygen, or aryl or alkyl groups or heterocycles.
  • A is a substituted nicotinamide group (i above, where Z is H), a substituted pyrazolo group (vii above), or a substituted 3-carboxamid-imidazolo group (x above, where Z is H).
  • B and C may be hydrogen, or one of B or C is a halogen, amino, or thiol group and the other of B or C is hydrogen; and D is a primary alcohol or hydrogen.
  • one of B or C may be halogen, amino, or thiol group when the other of B or C is a hydrogen.
  • D may be a hydrogen or an oxygen, nitrogen, carbon, or sulfur linked to phosphate, a phosphoryl group, a pyrophosphoryl group, or adenosine monophosphate through a phosphodiester or carbon-, nitrogen-, or sulfur-substituted phosphodiester bridge, or to adenosine diphosphate through a phosphodiester or carbon-, nitrogen-, or sulfur-substituted pyrophosphodiester bridge.
  • Analogues of adenosine monophosphnte or adenosine diphosphate also can replace the adenosine monophosphate or adenosine diphosphate groups.
  • A has two or more electron contributing moieties.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound is an isonicotinamide analog compound of formulas 12, 13, or 14 below.
  • Z is an alkyl, aryl, hydroxyl, OZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, amino, NHZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, or NHZ′Z′′ where Z′ and Z′′ are independently an alkyl or aryl;
  • E and F are independently H, CH 3 , OCH 3 , CH2CH 3 , NH 2 , OH, NHCOH, NHCOCH 3 , N(CH 3 ) 2 , C(CH 3 ) 2 , an aryl or a C3-C10 alkyl, preferably provided that, when one of of E or F is H, the other of E or F is not H;
  • G, J or K is CONHZ, Z is an alkyl, aryl, hydroxyl, OZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, amino
  • the compound is formula 12 above, wherein E and F are independently H, CH 3 , OCH 3 , or OH, preferably provided that, when one of E or F is H, the other of E or F is not H.
  • the compound is ⁇ -1′-5-methyl-nicotinamide-2′-deoxyribose, ⁇ -D-1′-5-methyl-nico-tinamide-2′-deoxyribofuranoside, ⁇ -1′-4,5-dimethyl-nicotinamide-2′-de-oxyribose or ⁇ -D-1′-4,5-dimethyl-nicotinamide-2′-deoxyribofuranoside.
  • the compound is ⁇ -1′-5-methyl-nicotinamide-2′-deoxyribose.
  • the electron-contributing moiety on A stabilizes the compounds of the invention such that they are less susceptible to hydrolysis from the rest of the compound. This improved chemical stability improves the value of the compound, since it is available for action for longer periods of time in biological systems due to resistance to hydrolytic breakdown.
  • suitable electron contributing moieties are methyl, ethyl, O-methyl, amino, NMc2, hydroxyl, CMc3, aryl and alkyl groups.
  • the electron-contributing moiety is a methyl, ethyl, O-methyl, amino group. In the most preferred embodiments, the electron-contributing moiety is a methyl group.
  • the compounds of formulas 11-14 are useful both in free form and in the form of salts.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts is intended to apply to non-toxic salts derived from inorganic or organic acids and includes, for example, salts derived from the following acids: hydrochloric, sulfuric, phosphoric, acetic, lactic, fumaric, succinic, tartaric, gluconic, citric, methanesulfonic, and p-toluenesulfonic acids.
  • pro-drug can have improved lipophilicity relative to the unconverted compound, and this can result in enhanced membrane permeability.
  • a pro-drug can have improved lipophilicity relative to the unconverted compound, and this can result in enhanced membrane permeability.
  • One particularly useful form of pro-drug is an ester derivative. Its utility relies upon the action of one or more of the ubiquitous intracellular lipases to catalyse the hydrolysis of ester groups, to release the active compound at or near its site of action.
  • one or more hydroxy groups in the compound can be O-acylated, to make an acylate derivative.
  • Pro-drug forms of a 5-phosphate ester derivative of compounds of formulas 11-14 can also be made. These may be particularly useful, since the anionic nature of the 5-phosphate may limit its ability to cross cellular membranes. Conveniently, such a 5-phosphate derivative can be converted to an uncharged bis(acyloxymethyl) ester derivative.
  • the utility of such a pro-drug relies upon the action of one or more of the ubiquitous intracellular lipases to catalyse the hydrolysis of ester groups, releasing a molecule of formaldehyde and a compound of the present invention at or near its site of action.
  • exemplary sirtuin-activating compounds are O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analogs, including 2′-O-acetyl-ADP-ribose and 3′-O-acetyl-ADP-ribose, and analogs thereof.
  • Exemplary O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analogs are described, for example, in U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2004/0053944; 2002/0061898; and 2003/0149261, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • sirtuin-activating compounds may be an O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analog having any of formulas 15-18 below.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound is an O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analog compound of formula 15: wherein:
  • W is OH or H, with the proviso that when W is OH, then A is CR where R is as defined above;
  • R4 and/or R5 are C1-C4 alkyl.
  • halogens when one or more halogens are present they are chosen from chlorine and fluorine.
  • Q is C1-C5 alkyl or phenyl.
  • D is H, or when D is other than H, B is OH.
  • B is OH
  • D is H, OH or NH 2
  • X is OH or H
  • Y is H, most preferably with Z as OH, H, or methylthio, especially OH.
  • W is OH
  • Y is H
  • X is OH
  • A is CR where R is methyl or halogen, preferably fluorine.
  • W is H
  • Y is H
  • X is OH
  • A is CH.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound is an O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analog compound of formula 16:
  • E is CONH 2 and G is NH 2 .
  • E is CONH 2
  • G is NH 2
  • X is OH or H
  • sirtuin-activating compounds include the following:
  • sirtuin-activating compounds are O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analog compounds of formula 17 and 18, their tautomers and pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • a pro-drug can have improved lipophilicity relative to the compound of formula (15) or formula (16), and this can result in enhanced membrane permeability.
  • One particularly useful form of a pro-drug is an ester derivative. Its utility relies upon the action of one or more of the ubiquitous intracellular lipases to catalyse the hydrolysis of these ester group(s), to release the compound of formula (15) and formula (16) at or near its site of action.
  • one or more of the hydroxy groups in a compound of formula (15) or formula (16) can be O-acylated, to make, for example a 5-O-butyrate or a 2,3-di-O-butyrate derivative.
  • Prodrug forms of 5-phosphate ester derivative of a compounds of formula (15) or formula (16) can also be made and may be particularly useful, since the anionic nature of the 5-phosphate may limit its ability to cross cellular membranes. Conveniently, such a 5-phosphate derivative can be converted to an uncharged bis(acyloxymethyl) ester derivative.
  • the utility of such a pro-drug relies upon the action of one or more of the ubiquitous intracellular lipases to catalyse the hydrolysis of these ester group(s), releasing a molecule of formaldehyde and the compound of formula (15) or formula (16) at or near its site of action.
  • analogs of 2′-AADPR or 3′-AADPR that are designed to have increased stability from esterase action through the use of well-known substitutes for ester oxygen atoms that are subject to esterase attack.
  • the esterase-labile oxygen atoms in 2′-AADPR and 3′-AADPR would be understood to be the ester oxygen linking the acetate group with the ribose, and the ester oxygen between the two phosphorus atoms.
  • substitution of either or both of these ester oxygen atoms with a CF2, a NH, or a S would be expected to provide a 2′-AADPR or 3′-AADPR analog that is substantially more stable due to increased resistance to esterase action.
  • the invention is directed to analogs 2′-O-acetyl-ADP-ribose or 3′-O-acetyl-ADP-ribose exhibiting increased stability in cells.
  • the preferred analogs comprise a CF2, a NH, or a S instead of the acetyl ester oxygen or the oxygen between two phosphorus atoms.
  • the most preferred substitute is CF2. Replacement of the acetyl ester oxygen is particularly preferred.
  • both the ester oxygen and the oxygen between the two phosphorus atoms are independently substituted with a CF2, a NH, or a S.
  • both the c is (Z) and trans (E) isomers are contemplated herein.
  • the compounds may exist in tautomeric forms, such as keto-enol tautomers, such as each tautomeric form is contemplated as being included within the methods presented herein, whether existing in equilibrium or locked in one form by appropriate substitution with R′.
  • the meaning of any substituent at any one occurrence is independent of its meaning, or any other substituent's meaning, at any other occurrence.
  • prodrugs of the sirtuin-activating compounds of formulas 1-10 are also included in the methods presented herein.
  • Prodrugs are considered to be any covalently bonded carriers that release the active parent drug in vivo.
  • Analogs and derivatives of the above sirtuin-activating compounds described herein can also be used for activating a member of the sirtuin protein family.
  • derivatives or analogs may make the compounds more stable or improve their ability to traverse cell membranes or being phagocytosed or pinocytosed.
  • Exemplary derivatives include glycosylated derivatives, as described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 6,361,815 for resveratrol.
  • Other derivatives of resveratrol include cis- and trans-resveratrol and conjugates thereof with a saccharide, such as to form a glucoside (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,414,037).
  • Glucoside polydatin referred to as piceid or resveratrol 3-O-beta-D-glucopyranoside
  • Saccharides to which compounds may be conjugated include glucose, galactose, maltose, lactose and sucrose.
  • Glycosylated stilbenes are further described in Regev-Shoshani et al. Biochemical J. (published on Apr. 16, 2003 as BJ20030141).
  • Other derivatives of compounds described herein are esters, amides and prodrugs. Esters of resveratrol are described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 6,572,882.
  • Resveratrol and derivatives thereof can be prepared as described in the art, e.g., in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,414,037; 6,361,815; 6,270,780; 6,572,882; and Brandolini et al. (2002) J. Agric. Food. Chem. 50: 7407. Derivatives of hydroxyflavones are described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 4,591,600. Resveratrol and other activating compounds can also be obtained commercially, e.g., from Sigma.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound may be at least partially isolated from its natural environment prior to use.
  • a plant polyphenol may be isolated from a plant and partially or significantly purified prior to use in the methods described herein.
  • An activating compound may also be prepared synthetically, in which case it would be free of other compounds with which it is naturally associated.
  • an activating composition comprises, or an activating compound is associated with, less than about 50%, 10%, 1%, 0.1%, 10-2% or 10-3% of a compound with which it is naturally associated.
  • a certain biological function is modulated by any one of a sirtuin-activating compound of a genus of compounds (e.g., having formula I), with the proviso that the genus does not include one or more specific compounds.
  • a sirtuin activator-activating compound may be any compound that is capable of increasing the level of expression and/or activity of a sirtuin protein with the proviso that the compound is not resveratrol, a flavone, or any other compound specifically cited herein or any other compound that has been shown to have an activating effect on a sirtuin protein prior to the priority date of this application.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound may be a compound of any one of formulas 1-18 with the proviso that the compound is not resveratrol, a flavone or, or any of the other compounds compound specifically cited herein, or any other compound which has been shown to have an activating effect on a sirtuin protein prior to the priority date of this application.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound does not include any of the compounds cited in U.S. Pat. No. 6,410,596 or 6,552,085, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • a sirtuin-activating compound does not include a compound having formula 22 as set forth below: wherein,
  • the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to inhibit P13-kinase, inhibit aldoreductase and/or inhibit tyrosine protein kinases at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin, e.g., SIRT1.
  • the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for inhibition of one or more of aldoreductase and/or tyrosine protein kinases, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • Methods for assaying P13-Kinase activity, aldose reductase activity, and tyrosine kinase activity are well known in the art and kits to perform such assays may be purchased commercially. See e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2003/0158212 for P13-kinase assays; U.S.
  • Patent Publication No. 2002/20143017 for aldose reductase assays; tyrosine kinase assay kits may be purchased commercially, for example, from Promega (Madison, Wis.; world wide web at promega.com), Invitrogen (Carlsbad, Calif.; world wide web at invitrogen.com) or Molecular Devices (Sunnyvale, Calif.; world wide web at moleculardevices.com).
  • the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to transactivate EGFR tyrosine kinase activity at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin.
  • the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for transactivating EGFR tyrosine kinase activity, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to cause coronary dilation at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin.
  • the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for coronary dilation, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • Methods for assaying vasodilation are well known in the art, see e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2004/0236153.
  • the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial spasmolytic activity at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin.
  • the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for spasmolytic effects (such as on gastrointestinal muscle), and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • Methods for assaying spasmolytic activity are well known in the art, see e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2004/0248987.
  • the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to inhibit hepatic cytochrome P450 1B1 (CYP) at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin.
  • the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for inhibition of P450 1B1, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • Methods for assaying cytochrome P450 activity are well known in the art and kits to perform such assays may be purchased commercially. See e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,420,131 and 6,335,428 and Promega (Madison, Wis.; world wide web at promega.com).
  • the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to inhibit nuclear factor-kappaB (NF- ⁇ B) at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin.
  • NF- ⁇ B nuclear factor-kappaB
  • the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for inhibition of NF- ⁇ B, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • kits to perform such assays may be purchased commercially (e.g., from Oxford Biomedical Research (Ann Arbor, Mich.; world wide web at oxfordbiomed.com)).
  • the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to inhibit a histone deacetylase (HDACs) class I, a HDAC class II, or HDACs I and II, at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin.
  • HDACs histone deacetylase
  • the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for inhibition of an HDAC I and/or HDAC II, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • kits to perform such assays may be purchased commercially. See e.g., BioVision, Inc. (Mountain View, Calif.; world wide web at biovision.com) and Thomas Scientific (Swedesboro, N.J.; world wide web at tomassci.com).
  • the subject SIRT1 activators do not have any substantial ability to activate SIRT1 orthologs in lower eukaryotes, particularly yeast or human pathogens, at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of human SIRT1.
  • the SIRT1 activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating human SIRT1 deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for activating yeast Sir2 (such as Candida, S. cerevisiae , etc), and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • the sirtuin activating compounds may have the ability to activate one or more sirtuin protein homologs, such as, for example, one or more of human SIRT1, SIRT2, SIRT3, SIRT4, SIRT5, SIRT6, or SIRT7.
  • a SIRT1 activator does not have any substantial ability to activate other sirtuin protein homologs, such as, for example, one or more of human SIRT2, SIRT3, SIRT4, SIRT5, SIRT6, or SIRT7, at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of human SIRT1.
  • the SIRT1 activator may be chosen to have an EC50 for activating human SIRT1 deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for activating one or more of human SIRT2, SIRT3, SIRT4, SIRT5, SIRT6, or SIRT7, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • SIRT3 and SIRT4 modulators may be used to modulate fat mobilization.
  • SIRT3 and/or SIRT4 activators may be used to induce fat mobilization and may be used to treat, e.g., obesity and insulin resistance disorders.
  • the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to inhibit protein kinases; to phosphorylate mitogen activated protein (MAP) kinases; to inhibit the catalytic or transcriptional activity of cyclo-oxygenases, such as COX-2; to inhibit nitric oxide synthase (iNOS); or to inhibit platelet adhesion to type I collagen at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin.
  • MAP mitogen activated protein
  • COX-2 cyclo-oxygenases
  • iNOS nitric oxide synthase
  • platelet adhesion to type I collagen at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin.
  • the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for performing any of these activities, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • Methods for assaying protein kinase activity, cyclo-oxygenase activity, nitric oxide synthase activity, and platelet adhesion activity are well known in the art and kits to perform such assays may be purchased commercially.
  • the sirtuin-activitating compounds described herein may be taken alone or in combination with other compounds.
  • the other compounds may be other sirtuin and/or AMPK activators.
  • LongevinexTM which is a red wine extract, and contains, in addition to resveratrol, other sirtuin activators, such as quercetin, is a particularly potent agent for mobilizing fat. Longevinex can be obtained on the world wide web at www.longevinex.com.
  • a combination drug regimen may also include drugs or compounds for the treatment or prevention of obesity and/or diabetes.
  • sirtuin-activating compounds may be administered as a combination therapy.
  • one or more sirtuin-activating compounds of formulas 1-10 may be used in combination with the following “anti-obesity agents”: phenylpropanolamine, ephedrine, pseudoephedrine, phentermine, a cholecystokinin-A agonist, a monoamine reuptake inhibitor (such as sibutramine), a sympathomimetic agent, a serotonergic agent (such as dexfenfluramine or fenfluramine), a dopamine agonist (such as bromocriptine), a melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor agonist or mimetic, a melanocyte-stimulating hormone analog, a cannabinoid receptor antagonist, a melanin concentrating hormone antagonist, the OB protein (leptin), a lept
  • anorectic agents include bombesin agonists, dehydroepiandrosterone or analogs thereof, glucocorticoid receptor agonists and antagonists, orexin receptor antagonists, urocortin binding protein antagonists, agonists of the glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor such as Exendin and ciliary neurotrophic factors such as Axokine.
  • one or more sirtuin-activating compounds of formulas 1-10 may be used in combination with the following “anti-diabetic agents”: an aldose reductase inhibitor, a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor, a sorbitol dehydrogenase inhibitor, a protein tyrosine phosphatase 1B inhibitor, a dipeptidyl protease inhibitor, insulin (including orally bioavailable insulin preparations), an insulin mimetic, metformin, acarbose, a peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor-y (PPAR-y) ligand such as troglitazone, rosaglitazone, pioglitazone or GW-1929, a sulfonylurea, glipazide, glyburide, or chlorpropamide wherein the amounts of the first and second compounds result in a therapeutic effect.
  • anti-diabetic agents an aldose reductase inhibitor, a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor
  • anti-diabetic agents include a glucosidase inhibitor, a glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1), insulin, a PPAR ⁇ / ⁇ dual agonist, a meglitimide and an ⁇ P2 inhibitor.
  • GLP-1 glucagon-like peptide-1
  • insulin a PPAR ⁇ / ⁇ dual agonist
  • meglitimide a meglitimide and an ⁇ P2 inhibitor.
  • an anti-diabetic agent may be a dipeptidyl peptidase IV (DP-IV or DPP-IV) inhibitor, such as, for example LAF237 from Novartis (NVP DPP728; 1-[[[2-[(5-cyanopyridin-2-yl)amino]ethyl]amino]acetyl]-2-cyano-(S)-pyrrolidine) or MK-04301 from Merck (see e.g., Hughes et al., Biochemistry 38: 11597-603 (1999)).
  • DP-IV or DPP-IV dipeptidyl peptidase IV
  • one or more sirtuin-activating compounds may be directed specifically to a certain tissue (e.g., liver) rather than the whole body.
  • tissue specific treatments may be used to treat, e.g., obesity and insulin resistance disorder.
  • the methods are useful for preventing fat accumulation in cells with lipogenic capacity, e.g. liver, pancreas and muscle cells.
  • Methods for reducing or preventing fat accumulation in a cell may also comprise increasing the protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 in a human cell, Sir2 in a yeast cell, Sir2.1 in C. elegans or a homologue of any of these sirtuins in other organisms.
  • a sirtuin such as SIRT1 in a human cell, Sir2 in a yeast cell, Sir2.1 in C. elegans or a homologue of any of these sirtuins in other organisms.
  • Increasing protein levels can be achieved by introducing into a cell one or more copies of a nucleic acid that encodes a sirtuin.
  • the level of SIRT1 can be increased in a mammalian cell by introducing into the mammalian cell a nucleic acid encoding SIRT1, e.g., having the amino acid sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 2.
  • the nucleic acid may be under the control of a promoter that regulates the expression of the SIRT1 nucleic acid.
  • the nucleic acid may be introduced into the cell at a location in the genome that is downstream of a promoter. Methods for increasing the level of a protein using these methods are well known in the art. Exemplary methods are described in the Examples.
  • a nucleic acid that is introduced into a cell to increase the protein level of a sirtuin may encode a protein that is at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to the sequence of a sirtuin, e.g., SEQ ID NO: 2.
  • the nucleic acid encoding the protein may be at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • the nucleic acid may also be a nucleic acid that hybridizes, preferably under stringent hybridization conditions, to a nucleic acid encoding a wild-type sirtuin, e.g., SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • Stringent hybridization conditions may include hybridization and a wash in 0.2 ⁇ SSC at 65° C.
  • a nucleic acid that encodes a protein that is different from a wild-type sirtuin protein such as a protein that is a fragment of a wild-type sirtuin
  • the protein is preferably biologically active, e.g., is capable of deacetylation. It is only necessary to express in a cell a portion of the sirtuin that is biologically active.
  • a protein that differs from wild-type SIRT1 having SEQ ID NO: 2 preferably contains the core structure thereof.
  • the core structure sometimes refers to amino acids 62-293 of SEQ ID NO: 2, which are encoded by nucleotides 237 to 932 of SEQ ID NO: 1, which encompasses the NAD binding as well as the substrate binding domains.
  • the core domain of SIRT1 may also refer to about amino acids 261 to 447 of SEQ ID NO: 2, which are encoded by nucleotides 834 to 1394 of SEQ ID NO: 1; to about amino acids 242 to 493 of SEQ ID NO: 2, which are encoded by nucleotides 777 to 1532 of SEQ ID NO: 1; or to about amino acids 254 to 495 of SEQ ID NO: 2, which are encoded by nucleotides 813 to 1538 of SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • Whether a protein retains a biological function e.g., deacetylation capabilities, can be determined according to methods known in the art.
  • Methods for increasing sirtuin protein levels also include methods for stimulating the transcription of genes encoding sirtuins, methods for stabilizing the corresponding mRNAs, methods, and other methods known in the art.
  • sirtuin inhibitory agents such as nicotinamide
  • increase fat accumulation in C. elegans See example 2.
  • Sirtuin inhibitory compounds include compounds that inhibit the activity of a class III histone deacetylase, such as a sirtuin, and include for example, nicotinamide (NAM), suranim; NF023 (a G-protein antagonist); NF279 (a purinergic receptor antagonist); Trolox (6-hydroxy-2,5,7,8,tetramethylchroman-2-carboxylic acid); ( ⁇ )-epigallocatechin (hydroxy on sites 3,5,7,3′,4′, 5′); ( ⁇ )-epigallocatechin (hydroxy on sites 3,5,7,3′,4′,5′); ( ⁇ )-epigallocatechin gallate (Hydroxy sites 5,7,3′,4′,5′ and gallate ester on 3); cyanidin choloride (3,5,7,3′,4′-pentahydroxyflavylium chloride); delphinidin chloride (3,5,7,3′,4′,5′-hexahydroxyflavyl
  • sirtuin inhibitory compounds may have any one of the following formulas:
  • both the c is (Z) and trans (E) isomers are contemplated herein.
  • the compounds may exist in tautomeric forms, such as keto-enol tautomers, such as each tautomeric form is contemplated as being included within the methods presented herein, whether existing in equilibrium or locked in one form by appropriate substitution with R′.
  • the meaning of any substituent at any one occurrence is independent of its meaning, or any other substituent's meaning, at any other occurrence.
  • prodrugs of the sirtuin inhibitory compounds of formulas 19-21 are included in the methods presented herein. Prodrugs are considered to be any covalently bonded carriers that release the active parent drug in vivo.
  • a sirtuin inhibitory compound may also be contacted with a cell or administered either alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents.
  • more than one sirtuin inhibitory compound may be contacted with a cell or administered.
  • at least 2, 3, 5, or 10 different sirtuin inhibitory compounds may be contacted with a cell or administered.
  • a sirtuin inhibitory compound may be administered as part of a combination therapy with another therapeutic agent.
  • Such combination therapies may be administered simultaneously (e.g., more than one therapeutic agent administered at the same time) or sequentially with e.g., different compounds or therapeutic agents administered at different times during a treatment regimen.
  • one or more sirtuin inhibitory compounds of formulas 19-21 may be used in combination with the following “weight gain promoting agents”: beta blockers (such as propranolo), alpha blockers (such as clonidine, prazosin and terazosin); insulin, sulfonylureas (such as glipizide and glyburide), thiazolidinediones (such as pioglitazone and rosiglitazone), meglitinides, nateglinide, repaglinide, lithium carbonate, valproic acid, carbamazepine, antidepressants, including, for example, tricyclics (such as amitriptyline and imipramine), monoamine-oxidase inhibitors, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), bupropion, paroxetine and mirtazapine, chlorpromazine, thiothixene, steroids (such as prednisone),
  • one or more sirtuin inhibitory compounds may be directed specifically to a certain tissue (e.g., liver) rather than the whole body. Tissue specific treatments may be used to treat, e.g., hyperglycemia.
  • Methods for stimulating fat accumulation in a cell may also comprise decreasing the protein level of a sirtuin in the cell. Decreasing a protein level can be achieved according to methods known in the art.
  • an siRNA, an antisense or ribozyme targeted to the sirtuin can be expressed in the cell.
  • a dominant negative sirtuin mutant e.g., a mutant that is not capable of deacetylating, may be used.
  • mutant H363Y of SIRT1 described, e.g., in Luo et al. (2001) Cell 107: 137 can be used.
  • agents that inhibit transcription can be used.
  • a compound described herein e.g., a sirtuin activator or inhibitor, does not have significant or detectable anti-oxidant activities, as determined by any of the standard assays known in the art.
  • a compound does not significantly scavenge free-radicals, such as O2 radicals.
  • a compound may have less than about 2, 3, 5, 10, 30 or 100 fold anti-oxidant activity relative to another compound, e.g., resveratrol.
  • a compound may also have a binding affinity for a sirtuin of about 10 ⁇ 9 M, 10 ⁇ 10 M, 10 ⁇ 11 M, 10 ⁇ 12 M or less.
  • a compound may reduce the Km of a sirtuin for its substrate or NAD+ by a factor of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 or 100.
  • a compound may increase the Vmax of a sirtuin by a factor of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 or 100.
  • Exemplary compounds that may increase the Vmax of a sirtuin include, for example, analogs of isonicotinamide, such as, for example, compounds of formulas 11-14, and/or analogs of O-acetyl-ADP-ribose, such as, for example, compounds of formulas 15-18.
  • a compound may have an EC50 for activating the deacetylase activity of a sirtuin of less than about 1 nM, less than about 10 nM, less than about 100 nM, less than about 1 ⁇ M, less than about 10 ⁇ M, less than about 100 ⁇ M, or from about 1-10 nM, from about 10-100 nM, from about 0.1-1 ⁇ M, from about 1-10 ⁇ M or from about 10-100 ⁇ M.
  • a compound may activate the deacetylase activity of a sirtuin by a factor of at least about 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, or 100, as measured in an acellular assay or in a cell based assay as described in the Examples.
  • a compound may cause at least a 10%, 30%, 50%, 80%, 2 fold, 5 fold, 10 fold, 50 fold or 100 fold greater induction of the deacetylase activity of SIRT1 relative to the same concentration of resveratrol or other compound described herein.
  • a compound may also have an EC50 for activating SIRT5 that is at least about 10 fold, 20 fold, 30 fold, 50 fold greater than that for activating SIRT1.
  • the methods and compositions described herein may include a combination therapy comprising (i) at least one sirtuin-activating compound that reduce the Km of a sirtuin for its substrate or NAD+ by a factor of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 or 100, and (ii) at least one sirtuin-activating compound that increases the Vmax of a sirtuin by a factor of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 or 100.
  • a combination therapy may comprise (i) at least one sirtuin-activating compound of formula 1-10, and (ii) at least one sirtuin-activating compound of formula 11-18.
  • a compound may traverse the cytoplasmic membrane of a cell.
  • a compound may have a cell-permeability of at least about 20%, 50%, 75%, 80%, 90% or 95%.
  • the compound may be essentially non-toxic to a cell or subject; the compound may be an organic molecule or a small molecule of 2000 amu or less, 1000 amu or less; a compound may have a half-life under normal atmospheric conditions of at least about 30 days, 60 days, 120 days, 6 months or I year; the compound may have a half-life in solution of at least about 30 days, 60 days, 120 days, 6 months or 1 year; a compound may be more stable in solution than resveratrol by at least a factor of about 50%, 2 fold, 5 fold, 10 fold, 30 fold, 50 fold or 100 fold; a compound may promote deacetylation of the DNA repair factor Ku70; a compound may promote deacetylation of RelA/p65; a compound may increase general turnover rates and enhance the sensitivity of cells to TNF-induced apoptosis.
  • sirtuin proteins may be contacted with a compound in vitro, e.g., in a solution or in a cell.
  • a sirtuin protein is contacted with a compound in a solution and an activity of the sirtuin, e.g., its ability to deacetylate a protein, such as a histone or, p53, or portions thereof, is determined.
  • a sirtuin is activated or inhibited by a compound when at least one of its biological activities, e.g., deacetylation, activity, is higher or lower, respectively, in the presence of the compound than in its absence.
  • Activation or inhibition may be by a factor of at least about 10%, 30%, 50%, 100% (i.e., a factor of two), 3, 10, 30, or 100.
  • Whether a sirtuin is activated or inhibited can be determined, e.g., by contacting the sirtuin or a cell or cell extract containing the sirtuin with a deacetylation target, such as a histone or, p53 protein, or portions thereof, and determining the level of acetylation of the deacetylation target.
  • a deacetylation target such as a histone or, p53 protein, or portions thereof
  • control sirtuin may be a recombinantly produced sirtuin that has not been contacted with a sirtuin-activating or -inhibiting compound.
  • a method may comprise administering to a subject, such as a subject in need thereof, a pharmaceutically effective amount of an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 or Sir2.
  • a subject in need of such a treatment may be a subject who is obese, or likely to become obese, or who has, or is, likely to gain excess weight, as predicted, e.g., from family history. Exemplary agents are those described herein. A combination of agents may also be administered.
  • a method may further comprise monitoring the weight of the subject and/or the level of activation of sirtuins, for example, in adipose tissue.
  • a method may comprise administering to a subject, such as a subject in need thereof, a pharmaceutically effective amount of an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 or Sir2.
  • a subject in need of such a treatment may be a subject who has insulin resistance or other precusor symptom of type II diabetes, who has type II diabetes, or who is likely to develop any of these conditions.
  • the subject may be a subject having insulin resistance, e.g., having high circulating levels of insulin and/or associated conditions, such as hyperlipidemia, dyslipogenesis, hypercholesterolemia, impaired glucose tolerance, high blood glucose sugar level, other manifestations of syndrome X, hypertension, atherosclerosis and lipodystrophy.
  • insulin resistance e.g., having high circulating levels of insulin and/or associated conditions, such as hyperlipidemia, dyslipogenesis, hypercholesterolemia, impaired glucose tolerance, high blood glucose sugar level, other manifestations of syndrome X, hypertension, atherosclerosis and lipodystrophy.
  • Exemplary agents are those described herein.
  • a combination of agents may also be administered.
  • a method may further comprise monitoring in the subject the state of any of these conditions and/or the level of activation of sirtuins, for example, in adipose tissue.
  • Other methods include administering to a subject of a combination of an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin and an agent that increases the activity or protein level of an AMPK, e.g., other than an agent that activates a sirtuin.
  • Activators of AMPK include AICAR or Metformin.
  • the protein level of AMPK may be increased by introducing into the cell a nucleic acid encoding AMPK.
  • the nucleotide sequence of the catalytic domain ( ⁇ 1) of human AMPK has the nucleotide sequence set forth in GenBank Accession No. NM — 206907 and encodes a protein having the amino acid sequence set forth in GenBank Accession No. NP — 996790.
  • the nucleotide sequence of the non-catalytic domain ( ⁇ 1) of human AMPK has the nucleotide sequence set forth in GenBank Accession No. NM — 006253 and encodes a protein having the amino acid sequence set forth in GenBank Accession No. NP — 006244.
  • the nucleotide sequence of the non-catalytic domain ( ⁇ 1) of human AMPK has the nucleotide sequence set forth in GenBank Accession No. NM — 212461 and encodes a protein having the amino acid sequence sets forth in GenBank Accession No. NP — 997626.
  • Nucleic acid sequences encoding the different subunits may be contained on the same or separate nucleic acid molecules.
  • diseases that may be treated by administering an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin and/or AMPK include certain renal diseases including glomerulonephritis, glomerulosclerosis, nephrotic syndrome, hypertensive nephrosclerosis. These compounds may also be useful for improving cognitive functions in dementia, treating diabetic complications, psoriasis, polycystic ovarian syndrome (PCOS) and prevention and treatment of bone loss, e.g. osteoporosis.
  • PCOS polycystic ovarian syndrome
  • Additional diseases and conditions that will benefit from weight loss and can be treated as described herein include: high blood pressure, hypertension, high blood cholesterol, dyslipidemia, type 2 diabetes, insulin resistance, glucose intolerance, hyperinsulinemia, coronary heart disease, angina pectoris, congestive heart failure, stroke, gallstones, cholescystitis and cholelithiasis, gout, osteoarthritis, obstructive sleep apnea and respiratory problems, some types of cancer (such as endometrial, breast, prostate, and colon), complications of pregnancy, poor female reproductive health (such as menstrual irregularities, infertility, irregular ovulation), bladder control problems (such as stress incontinence); uric acid nephrolithiasis; psychological disorders (such as depression, eating disorders, distorted body image, and low self esteem).
  • a method may comprise administering to a subject, such as a subject in need thereof, a pharmaceutically effective amount of an agent that decreases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 or Sir2.
  • a subject in need of such a treatment may be a subject who has cachexia or likely to develop cachexia.
  • Exemplary agents are those described herein.
  • a combination of agents may also be administered.
  • a method may further comprise monitoring in the subject the state of the disease or of activation of sirtuins, for example, in adipose tissue.
  • Methods for stimulating fat accumulation in cells may be used in vitro, to establish cell models of weight gain, which may be used, e.g., for identifying other drugs that prevent weight gain.
  • a method for stimulating weight gain or fat accumulation in a cell or subject may further comprise decreasing the activity or protein level of an AMPK. This can be achieved, e.g., by inhibiting the expression, transcription, translation or posttanslational modification of at least one of the three subunits of AMPK, such as the catalytic subunit. Techniques known in the art, such as RNAi, antisense and ribozyme can be used. In addition, dominant negative mutants may be expressed in the cell. Dominant negative mutants, such as having a mutated AMPK alpha subunit are described, e.g., in Minokoshi et al. (2004) Nature 428: 569; Xing et al. (2003) J. Biol. Chem.
  • a method for inhibiting adipogenesis may comprise contacting a cell with an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin, such as a sirtuin activating compound, e.g., a compound described herein.
  • a method for stimulating adipogenesis may comprise contacting a cell with an agent that decreases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin, such as a sirtuin inhibiting compound, e.g., a compound described herein.
  • resveratrol and other sirtuin activating compounds may be used for treating or preventing conditions that can benefit from AMPK modulation, e.g., which are associated with and/or regulated by AMPK, in addition to those described above.
  • exemplary conditions include clinical symptoms associated with hypoxia or ischemia (myocardial infarction, stroke), and disorders of nutrition (see U.S. Pat. No. 6,124,125).
  • any compound that activates AMPK may be used for the same purposes as sirtuin activating compounds may be used, e.g., to extend lifespan, to make cells more resistant to stress and to protect cells against apoptosis.
  • Methods may include administrating to a subject, e.g., a subject in need thereof, an amount of a sirtuin activator or an agent that increases the protein level of a sirtuin in the subject.
  • a subject in need of such a treatment may be a subject who is overweight, obese or a subject likely to become overweight or obese.
  • the method may comprise administering daily, every other day, or once a week, a dose, e.g., in the form of a pill, to a subject.
  • the dose may be an “appetite reducing dose.”
  • Such a dose may be, e.g., one pill of LongevinexTM daily.
  • Such assays may comprise determining the level activity or expression (e.g., mRNA, pre-mRNA or protein) of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1, or AMPK in a subject.
  • a sirtuin such as SIRT1, or AMPK
  • a low level of sirtuin activity or expression in a subject is likely to indicate that the subject has or is likely to develop weight gain, obesity, insulin resistance, diabetes, precursor symptoms thereof or secondary conditions thereof.
  • a higher level of sirtuin activity or expression in a subject is likely to indicate that the subject has or is likely to develop weight loss and be protected from developing high weight associated diseases, such as insulin resistance and diabetes.
  • Other assays include determining the activity or level of expression of a sirtuin and AMPK.
  • a method may comprise identifying an agent that modulates the activity or protein level of a sirtuin and testing whether the test agent modulates weight gain and/or can be used for treating or preventing insulin resistance or diabetes.
  • the first step of the method may comprise contacting a sirtuin with a test agent and determining the effect of the test agent on the activity of the sirtuin, e.g., SIRT1, as described, e.g., in Howitz et al., supra.
  • the first step of the method may also comprise contacting a cell comprising a sirtuin with a test agent and determining the effect of the test agent on the activity of or expression level of the sirtuin.
  • Expression levels of a sirtuin may be determined by measuring the mRNA, pre-mRNA or protein level of the sirtuin.
  • the second step of the method may comprise testing the agent in an animal model for obesity, insulin resistance and/or diabetes. Such animal models are well known in the art. Screening methods may further comprise a step to determine the toxicity or adverse effects of the agents.
  • screening assays comprise identifying agents that modulate AMPK activity or protein levels. There is a need for compounds that activate AMPK but do not have the toxicities or adverse effects of known AMPK activators, such as metformin/phenformin.
  • compositions for use in accordance with the present methods may be formulated in conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers or excipients.
  • sirtuin-activating or -inhibiting compounds and their physiologically acceptable salts and solvates may be formulated for administration by, for example, injection, inhalation or insufflation (either through the mouth or the nose) or oral, buccal, parenteral or rectal administration.
  • the compound is administered locally, at the site where the target cells, e.g., fat cells, are present, i.e., in the adipose tissue.
  • Compounds can be formulated for a variety of loads of administration, including systemic and topical or localized administration. Techniques and formulations generally may be found in Remmington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Meade Publishing Co., Easton, Pa.
  • injection is preferred, including intramuscular, intravenous, intraperitoneal, and subcutaneous.
  • the compounds can be formulated in liquid solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hank's solution or Ringer's solution.
  • the compounds may be formulated in solid form and redissolved or suspended immediately prior to use. Lyophilized forms are also included.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may take the form of, for example, tablets, lozanges, or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose); fillers (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc or silica); disintegrants (e.g., potato starch or sodium starch glycolate); or wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulphate).
  • binding agents e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose
  • fillers e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate
  • lubricants e.g., magnesium stearate, talc or silica
  • disintegrants e.g
  • Liquid preparations for oral administration may take the form of, for example, solutions, syrups or suspensions, or they may be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use.
  • Such liquid preparations may be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., ationd oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol or fractionated vegetable oils); and preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl-p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid).
  • the preparations may also contain buffer salts, flavoring, coloring and sweetening agents as appropriate.
  • Preparations for oral administration may be suitably formulated to give controlled release of the active compound.
  • Polyphenols such as resveratrol can oxidize and lose sirtuin-stimulatory activity, especially in a liquid or semi-solid form.
  • the compounds may be stored in a nitrogen atmosphere or sealed in a type of capsule and/or foil package that excludes oxygen (e.g. CapsugelTM).
  • the compounds may be conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • the compounds may be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, e.g., by bolus injection or continuous infusion.
  • Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative.
  • the compositions may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents.
  • the active ingredient may be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
  • the compounds may also be formulated in rectal compositions such as suppositories or retention enemas, e.g., containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides.
  • the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection.
  • the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
  • Controlled release formula also include patches.
  • compositions may comprise from about 0.00001 to 100% such as from 0.001 to 10% or from 0.1% to 5% by weight of one or more compounds described herein.
  • a compound described herein is incorporated into a topical formulation containing a topical carrier that is generally suited to topical drug administration and comprising any such material known in the art.
  • the topical carrier may be selected so as to provide the composition in the desired form, e.g., as an ointment, lotion, cream, microemulsion, gel, oil, solution, or the like, and may be comprised of a material of either naturally occurring or synthetic origin. It is preferable that the selected carrier not adversely affect the active agent or other components of the topical formulation.
  • suitable topical carriers for use herein include water, alcohols and other nontoxic organic solvents, glycerin, mineral oil, silicone, petroleum jelly, lanolin, fatty acids, vegetable oils, parabens, waxes, and the like.
  • Formulations may be colorless, odorless ointments, lotions, creams, microemulsions and gels.
  • ointments which generally are semisolid preparations which are typically based on petrolatum or other petroleum derivatives.
  • the specific ointment base to be used is one that will provide for optimum drug delivery, and, preferably, will provide for other desired characteristics as well, e.g., emolliency or the like.
  • an ointment base should be inert, stable, nonirritating and nonsensitizing.
  • ointment bases may be grouped in four classes: oleaginous bases; emulsifiable bases; emulsion bases; and water-soluble bases.
  • Oleaginous ointment bases include, for example, vegetable oils, fats obtained from animals, and semisolid hydrocarbons obtained from petroleum.
  • Emulsifiable ointment bases also known as absorbent ointment bases, contain little or no water and include, for example, hydroxystearin sulfate, anhydrous lanolin and hydrophilic petrolatum.
  • Emulsion ointment bases are either water-in-oil (W/O) emulsions or oil-in-water (O/W) emulsions, and include, for example, cetyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate, lanolin and stearic acid.
  • Exemplary water-soluble ointment bases are prepared from polyethylene glycols (PEGs) of varying molecular weight; again, reference may be had to Remington's, supra, for further information.
  • Lotions may be incorporated into lotions, which generally are preparations to be applied to the skin surface without friction, and are typically liquid or semiliquid preparations in which solid particles, including the active agent, are present in a water or alcohol base.
  • Lotions are usually suspensions of solids, and may comprise a liquid oily emulsion of the oil-in-water type. Lotions are preferred formulations for treating large body areas, because of the ease of applying a more fluid composition. It is generally necessary that the insoluble matter in a lotion be finely divided. Lotions will typically contain and holding the active agent in contact with the skin, e.g., methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, or the like.
  • An exemplary lotion formulation for use in conjunction with the present method contains propylene glycol mixed with a hydrophilic petrolatum such as that which may be obtained under the trademark AquaphorRTM from Beiersdorf, Inc. (Norwalk, Conn.).
  • Cream bases are water-washable, and contain an oil phase, an emulsifier and an aqueous phase.
  • the oil phase is generally comprised of petrolatum and a fatty alcohol such as cetyl or stearyl alcohol; the aqueous phase usually, although not necessarily, exceeds the oil phase in volume, and generally contains a humectant.
  • the emulsifier in a cream formulation is generally a nonionic, anionic, cationic or amphoteric surfactant.
  • microemulsions which generally are thermodynamically stable, isotropically clear dispersions of two immiscible liquids, such as oil and water, stabilized by an interfacial film of surfactant molecules (Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology (New York: Marcel Dekker, 1992), volume 9).
  • surfactant emulsifier
  • co-surfactant co-emulsifier
  • an oil phase and a water phase are necessary.
  • Suitable surfactants include any surfactants that are useful in the preparation of emulsions, e.g., emulsifiers that are typically used in the preparation of creams.
  • the co-surfactant is generally selected from the group of polyglycerol derivatives, glycerol derivatives and fatty alcohols.
  • Preferred emulsifier/co-emulsifier combinations are generally although not necessarily selected from the group consisting of: glyceryl monostearate and polyoxyethylene stearate; polyethylene glycol and ethylene glycol palmitostearate; and caprilic and capric triglycerides and oleoyl macrogolglycerides.
  • the water phase includes not only water but also, typically, buffers, glucose, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycols, preferably lower molecular weight polyethylene glycols (e.g., PEG 300 and PEG 400), and/or glycerol, and the like, while the oil phase will generally comprise, for example, fatty acid esters, modified vegetable oils, silicone oils, mixtures of mono- di- and triglycerides, mono- and di-esters of PEG (e.g., oleoyl macrogol glycerides), etc.
  • buffers glucose, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycols, preferably lower molecular weight polyethylene glycols (e.g., PEG 300 and PEG 400), and/or glycerol, and the like
  • the oil phase will generally comprise, for example, fatty acid esters, modified vegetable oils, silicone oils, mixtures of mono- di- and triglycerides, mono- and di-esters of PEG (e.g., ole
  • Gel formulations which generally are semisolid systems consisting of either suspensions made up of small inorganic particles (two-phase systems) or large organic molecules distributed substantially uniformly throughout a carrier liquid (single phase gels).
  • Single phase gels can be made, for example, by combining the active agent, a carrier liquid and a suitable gelling agent such as tragacanth (at 2 to 5%), sodium alginate (at 2-10%), gelatin (at 2-15%), methylcellulose (at 3-5%), sodium carboxymethylcellulose (at 2-5%), carbomer (at 0.3-5%) or polyvinyl alcohol (at 10-20%) together and mixing until a characteristic semisolid product is produced.
  • suitable gelling agents include methylhydroxycellulose, polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene, hydroxyethylcellulose and gelatin.
  • additives may be included in formulations, e.g., topical formulations.
  • additives include, but are not limited to, solubilizers, skin permeation enhancers, opacifiers, preservatives (e.g., anti-oxidants), gelling agents, buffering agents, surfactants (particularly nonionic and amphoteric surfactants), emulsifiers, emollients, thickening a gents, stabilizers, humectants, colorants, fragrance, and the like.
  • solubilizers and/or skin permeation enhancers is particularly preferred, along with emulsifiers, emollients and preservatives.
  • An optimum topical formulation comprises approximately: 2 wt. % to 60 wt. %, preferably 2 wt. % to 50 wt. %, solubilizer and/or skin permeation enhancer; 2 wt. % to 50 wt. %, preferably 2 wt. % to 20 wt. %, emulsifiers; 2 wt. % to 20 wt. % emollient; and 0.01 to 0.2 wt. % preservative, with the active agent and carrier (e.g., water) making of the remainder of the formulation.
  • the active agent and carrier e.g., water
  • a skin permeation enhancer serves to facilitate passage of therapeutic levels of active agent to pass through a reasonably sized area of unbroken skin.
  • Suitable enhancers include, for example: lower alkanols such as methanol ethanol and 2-propanol; alkyl methyl sulfoxides such as dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), decylmethylsulfoxide (C 10 MSO) and tetradecylmethyl sulfoxide; pyrrolidones such as 2-pyrrolidone, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-(-hydroxyethyl)pyrrolidone; urea; N,N-diethyl-m-toluamide; C 2 -C 6 alkanediols; miscellaneous solvents such as dimethyl formamide (DMF), N,N-dimethylacetamide (DMA) and tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol; and the 1-substituted azacycloh
  • solubilizers include, but are not limited to, the following: hydrophilic ethers such as diethylene glycol monoethyl ether (ethoxydiglycol, available commercially as TranscutolRTM) and diethylene glycol monoethyl ether oleate (available commercially as SoftcutolRTM); polyethylene castor oil derivatives such as polyoxy 35 castor oil, polyoxy 40 hydrogenated castor oil, etc.; polyethylene glycol, particularly lower molecular weight polyethylene glycols such as PEG 300 and PEG 400, and polyethylene glycol derivatives such as PEG-8 caprylic/capric glycerides (available commercially as LabrasolRTM); alkyl methyl sulfoxides such as DMSO; pyrrolidones such as 2-pyrrolidone and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone; and DMA. Many solubilizers can also act as absorption enhancers. A single solubilizer may be incorporated into the formulation, or a mixture of solub
  • Suitable emulsifiers and co-emulsifiers include, without limitation, those emulsifiers and co-emulsifiers described with respect to microemulsion formulations.
  • Emollients include, for example, propylene glycol, glycerol, isopropyl myristate, polypropylene glycol-2 (PPG-2) myristyl ether propionate, and the like.
  • sunscreen formulations e.g., anti-inflammatory agents, analgesics, antimicrobial agents, antifungal agents, antibiotics, vitamins, antioxidants, and sunblock agents commonly found in sunscreen formulations including, but not limited to, anthranilates, benzophenones (particularly benzophenone-3), camphor derivatives, cinnamates (e.g., octyl methoxycinnamate), dibenzoyl methanes (e.g., butyl methoxydibenzoyl methane), p-aminobenzoic acid (PABA) and derivatives thereof, and salicylates (e.g., octyl salicylate).
  • sunscreen formulations including, but not limited to, anthranilates, benzophenones (particularly benzophenone-3), camphor derivatives, cinnamates (e.g., octyl methoxycinnamate), dibenzoyl methanes (e.g., but
  • the active agent is present in an amount in the range of approximately 0.25 wt. % to 75 wt. % of the formulation, preferably in the range of approximately 0.25 wt. % to 30 wt. % of the formulation, more preferably in the range of approximately 0.5 wt. % to 15 wt. % of the formulation, and most preferably in the range of approximately 1.0 wt. % to 10 wt. % of the formulation.
  • Topical skin treatment compositions can be packaged in a suitable container to suit its viscosity and intended use by the consumer.
  • a lotion or cream can be packaged in a bottle or a roll-ball applicator, or a propellant-driven aerosol device or a container fitted with a pump suitable for finger operation.
  • the composition When the composition is a cream, it can simply be stored in a non-deformable bottle or squeeze container, such as a tube or a lidded jar.
  • the composition may also be included in capsules such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,063,507. Accordingly, also provided are closed containers containing a cosmetically acceptable composition as herein defined.
  • a pharmaceutical formulation for oral or parenteral administration, in which case the formulation may comprise an activating compound-containing microemulsion as described above, and may contain alternative pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, vehicles, additives, etc. particularly suited to oral or parenteral drug administration.
  • an activating compound-containing microemulsion may be administered orally or parenterally substantially as described above, without modification.
  • a cell is obtained from a subject following administration of an activating or inhibiting compound to the subject, such as by obtaining a biopsy, and the activity of the sirtuin or sirtuin expression level is determined in the biopsy.
  • biomarkers such as plasma biomarkers may be followed. Biomarkers may be adipose cell derived secretory proteins, such as leptin, adiponectin, and resistin.
  • the cell may be any cell of the subject, but in cases in which an activating compound is administered locally, the cell is preferably a cell that is located in the vicinity of the site of administration.
  • the cell may be an adipocyte.
  • Other factors that may be monitored include weight, body mass, blood glucose sugar levels, blood lipid levels and any other factor that may be measured for monitoring diseases or conditions described herein.
  • nucleic acid encoding a sirtuin, an AMPK or molecules that will reduced the protein level of a sirtuin or AMPK in a cell may be accomplished using an expression vector.
  • exemplary expression vectors include adenoviral vectors or adenoviral-associated viruses (AAV). These vectors, as well as others and methods for infecting target cells are well known in the art.
  • nucleic acids may also be introduced into cells using liposomes or similar technologies.
  • kits e.g., kits for therapeutic purposes, including kits for modulating fat accumulation.
  • a kit may comprise one or more agent that modulates sirtuin or AMPK protein activity or level, e.g., sirtuin activating or inhibitory compounds, such as those described herein, and optionally devices for contacting cells with the agents.
  • Devices include syringes, stents and other devices for introducing a compound into a subject or applying it to the skin of a subject.
  • kits may also contain components for measuring a factor, e.g., described above, such as the activity of sirtuin proteins, e.g., in tissue samples.
  • kits for diagnosing the likelihood of having or developing weight gain, obesity, insulin-resistance, diabetes, precursors thereof or secondary conditions thereof.
  • a kit may comprise an agent for measuring the activity and or expression level of a sirtuin or AMPK.
  • kits for screening assays comprise one or more agents for conducting a screening assay, such as a sirtuin, an AMPK or a biologically active portion thereof, or a cell or cell extract comprising such. Any of the kits may also comprise instructions for use.
  • This example shows that a compound that activates sirtuins, resveratrol, stimulates fat metabolism by reducing fat accumulation in C. elegans.
  • Wild-type N2 C. elegans worms were grown on OP50 bacteria and exposed overnight to vehicle (0.1% ethanol) alone or with 10, 50 or 100 ⁇ M of resveratrol (in ethanol). Fat accumulation was visualized with Nile Red staining, as described further below and in Ashrafi K, et al. Nature 421: 268-27 (2003).
  • Sir2.1 which is activated by resveratrol, acts via the transcription factor DAF-16 to prolong lifespan in yeast (Tissenbaum and Guarente (2001) Nature 410: 227).
  • DAF-16 mutant worms which are defective in insulin-signaling
  • resveratrol stimulates fat mobilization and a decrease in fat accumulation ( FIG. 2 ). This indicates that resveratrol signaling to fat metabolism in adult worms occurs via a pathway that is independent of DAF-16.
  • compounds in the resveratrol class that stimulate sirtuin proteins can promote fat mobilization in both wild-type and mutant C. elegans.
  • Nicotinamide Promotes Fat Accumulation
  • inhibitors of sirtuin proteins should increase fat accumulation.
  • C. elegans worms were incubated overnight in the presence of 0, 1 or 10 mM nicotinamide, and stained with Nile-Red as described above. The results, which are shown in FIG. 3 , indicate that the worms displayed a nicotinamide-concentration dependent increase in fat accumulation.
  • AMPK is also necessary for mediating this effect.
  • AMPK regulates diverse aspects of cell metabolism, glucose uptake and fatty acid oxidation.
  • Many therapeutic agents and hormones that improve insulin sensitivity e.g., 5-aminoimidazole-4-carboxamide-1-beta-D-ribofuranoside (AICAR) and Metformin, (decrease circulating insulin levels) are known to activate AMPK signaling to glucose uptake and fatty acid oxidation.
  • AICAR 5-aminoimidazole-4-carboxamide-1-beta-D-ribofuranoside
  • Metformin Metformin
  • AMPK regulates fat metabolism by stimulating fatty acid oxidation via a series of complex steps that involve phosphorylation/inactivation of acetyl coA carboxylase, release of carnitine-palmitoyl transferase-1 (CPT-1) and carnitine octanoyl transferase (COT) from end product inhibition by malonyl coA, and transport of fatty acids into the mitochondria to be oxidized.
  • CPT-1 carnitine-palmitoyl transferase-1
  • COT carnitine octanoyl transferase
  • C. elegans database We have examined the C. elegans database and found two gene products that are highly related to mammalian AMPK, TOC1.8 and Par2.3; five genes encoding homologs of CPT-1 and one gene encoding a homolog of COT.
  • C. elegans worms were incubated with bacteria carrying RNAi vector alone, or interfering RNA against TOC1.8 or F41E7.3, a C. elegans homologue of COT in the presence or absence of AICAR. Fat accumulation was visualized with Nile-Red, as described below. The results indicate that RNA inactivation of TOC1.8 or COT inhibits AICAR-stimulated fat mobilization.
  • AICAR/AMPK signaling to fatty acid oxidation is conserved in worms and mammalian cells.
  • RNA inactivation of TOC1.8 a homolog of mammalian AMPK or F41E7.3, a homolog of mammalian COT, blocks resveratrol-stimulated fat mobilization (see panels b and c of FIG. 5 ).
  • AMPK is necessary for resveratrol-induced fat mobilization.
  • resveratrol analogous to the direct AMPK activator AICAR, stimulates the AMPK signaling cascade to fat metabolism in worms.
  • RNA inactivation of DAF-16 the transcription factor downstream of insulin signaling to longevity, or inactivation of DAF-16 by mutation, had no effect on resveratrol-stimulated fat mobilization (see panel d of FIG. 5 ).
  • RNA inactivation of AMPK and COT suggested that the effect of resveratrol and AICAR to mobilize fat in worms is dependent on activation of the AMPK signaling cascade to fatty acid oxidation.
  • AMPK activation we examined whether resveratrol-stimulated cells show increased phosphorylation of threonine residue 172 in AMPK or increased phosphorylation of acetyl coA carboxylase (ACC) at serine 79, modifications that correlate with activation of AMPK and inactivation of ACC, respectively.
  • ACC acetyl coA carboxylase
  • CHO-HIR mammalian cells were washed in PBS and incubated overnight in serum-free DMEM before treatment with 500 ⁇ M AICAR (positive control) or 12.5 ⁇ M, 25 ⁇ M or 50 ⁇ M resveratrol. Cells were harvested after 30 minutes and lysates were immediately boiled in SDS and subjected to Western analysis with site-specific antibodies. Phosphorylation of AMPK at Thr172 indicates activation of the kinase. Active AMPK phosphorylates and inactivates ACC at serine 79.
  • CHO cells were also treated with 500 ⁇ M AICAR (positive control), DMSO, 100 nM, 500 nM, 2.5 ⁇ M, 12.5 ⁇ M, 25 ⁇ M, or 50 ⁇ M resveratrol and subject to Western Blot analysis as described above.
  • Western blots were stripped and re-probed for phosphorylated (active) AMPK, total AMPK, phosphorylated acetyl CoA carboxylase (ACC), which is the downstream target of AMPK, and tubulin, which served as a loading control.
  • FIG. 7 shows activation of AMPK in CHO cells with increasing concentrations of resveratrol.
  • FIG. 8 shows that resveratrol stimulated the phosphorylation of ACC at both day 6 and day 10. ACC was also phosphorylated when the cells were incubated in serum free media overnight before harvesting (lanes marked “SF”). The reason for the extra band in the SIRT1 blot at day 6 is unknown, but we hypothesize that it may be a modified form of SIRT1. Tubulin served as a loading control.
  • FIG. 10 shows phosphorylation of ACC and AMPK, which reflects AMPK activity. Total protein for each is also shown. It is also noted that the loading controls, GAPDH and tubulin, are expressed but at extremely low levels in these cells and may only reflect the presence of undifferentiated 3T3 cells.
  • FIG. 10 also shows a separate dose-response curve on the far right.
  • FIG. 11 shows that resveratrol still has effects in the absence of the known AMPK kinase, LKB1.
  • LKB1 known AMPK kinase
  • FIG. 11 shows that resveratrol still has effects in the absence of the known AMPK kinase, LKB1.
  • Cells in the left panel were incubated overnight without serum before harvesting; the cells on the right were not incubated under serum free conditions. While loading is lower for the LKB1 -/- cells, resveratrol still causes an upregulation of both AMPK and ACC phosphorylation.
  • Tubulin served as a loading control.
  • AICAR stimulates AMPK signaling and inhibits adipogenesis in 3T3 cells.
  • resveratrol inhibited the expression o f adipogenic transcription regulators such as PPAR- ⁇ we found that cells exposed to resveratrol did not show an increase in PPAR- ⁇ RNA, which typically accompany differentiation of the cells into adipocytes. This suggests that resveratrol inhibits differentiation of cells into adipocytes. This may also suggest that resveratrol inhibits PPAR- ⁇ activity or expression.
  • 3T3-L1 and NIH3T3 cells were infected with a plasmid expressing GFP or PPAR- ⁇ and grown to confluence. Cells were differentiated into adipocytes as described below in the presence of 0 ⁇ M, 25 ⁇ M or 50 ⁇ M resveratrol in vehicle (ethanol). After eight days of differentiation, cells were fixed and stained with Oil red O. As expected, overexpression of PPAR- ⁇ partially negated inhibition of 3T 3 preadipocyte differentiation by resveratrol ( FIG. 13 ). This observation suggests that resveratrol inhibits PPAR- ⁇ activated fat cell differentiation.
  • SIRT1 ⁇ HY virus encoding GFP
  • SIRT1 ⁇ HY deacetylase deficient form of SIRT1
  • C. elegans strains were maintained as described at 25° C., except when noted (Brenner (1974) Genetics 77: 71).
  • the wild type reference strain was N2 Bristol; the mutant strains were: sir-2.1(ok434), TO1C8.1(ok524), and daf-16 (mgDf47).
  • Daf-16 (mgDf47) was obatined from the Ruvkun laboratory, MGH; all other strains were obtained from the Caenorhabditis Genetics Center (from C. Elegans Gene Knockout Consortium). Growth conditions and resveratrol exposure.
  • Synchronized starved L1 worms were grown in the presence of Nile Red. Strains were grown on NGM plates at 25° C. for approximately 48 hours until the young adult stage was reached. 20-30 young adult worms were then washed 2 ⁇ with M9 buffer and transferred to new NGM/Nile red experimental plates that contained either OP50 or HTT5 E. coli carrying the L4440 RNAi control vector.
  • OP50 plates were coated with vehicle alone or Nicotinamide (in PBS), or vehicle alone and Resveratrol (in Ethanol or DMSO).
  • RNAi plates were seeded with HTT5 E. coli carrying either the L4440 RNAi vector control or the specific RNAi clones TO1C8.1, AMPK; R11A8.4, sir-2.1; or F41E7.6 COT in the presence or absence of 100 ⁇ M resveratrol. Young adults were transferred to plates containing the appropriate vector, Nile Red stain and drug then maintained at 25° C. Nile Red staining was assessed 24 hours after resveratrol treatment by UV microscopy.
  • Resveratrol (Indofine #024964) was dissolved in Ethanol or DMSO to a 10 mM stock solution. Resveratrol was added to 60 mm NGM agar dishes containing either OP50 or RNAi expressing bacteria (HT115) to a final concentration of 10 ⁇ m, 50 ⁇ m, and 100 ⁇ M. Nile Red was also added to plates to a final concentration of 0.05 ⁇ g/ml. Nicotinamide (Supelco # 47865-U) was diluted in PBS including Nile Red and added to 60 mM dishes containing OP50 to a final concentration of 1 mM, 10 mM, or 100 mM.
  • Nile Red Powder (Sigma #N-3013) was dissolved in acetone at 500 ⁇ g/ml, diluted in 1 ⁇ Phosphate Buffered Saline (PBS) including appropriate drug and applied to surface of Nematode Growth Media (NGM) plates previously seeded with OP50 or RNAi bacteria, at a final concentration of 0.05 ⁇ g/ml. Fat content was monitored and recorded by fluorescence microscopy.
  • PBS Phosphate Buffered Saline
  • NNM Nematode Growth Media
  • Nile Red Staining was visualized by using a Nikon TE2000S microscope equipped with a CY3 filter (emission 535-685 nm). Images were captured using a SPOT RT monochrome digital camera attached to the Nikon Microscope with SPOT RT software v3.5. All Nile red images were acquired using identical settings and exposure times and then changed to red palette.
  • HT115 E. Coli carrying the RNAi vector, L4440 were used for maintenance media containing 50 ⁇ g/ml ampicillin for 18 hours. 350 ⁇ l of each culture was spotted to a 60 mm dish containing NGM agar, 6 mM IPTG and 25 ⁇ g/ml carbenicillin. After overnight incubation (at room temp), Nile Red was added on top of each dish to a final concentration of 0.05 ⁇ g/ml along with the experimental compounds indicated in the figure legends. Nile Red staining was assessed after 24 hrs by UV microscopy. For each batch of RNAi clones tested, L4440 (vector alone) was included. A phenotype was assigned only if a majority of the animals displayed the phenotype. All phenotypes were confirmed by at least three additional rounds of testing.
  • 3T3-L1 and NIH3T3 cells were maintained in DMEM plus 10% calf serum.
  • Adipocyte differentiation of 3T3-L1 cells was performed as described previously (MacDougald, O. A. and Lane, M. D. (1995). Transcriptional regulation of gene expression during adipocyte differentiation. Annu. Rev. Biochem. 64, 345-373).
  • NIH3T3 cells were induced to form adipocytes under the same conditions as 3T3-L1 cells, but with 6 days of treatment with insulin, dexamethasone, and isobutylmethylxanthine in 10% fetal calf serum after cells reach confluence.
  • the mammalian retrovirus expression vector pMX (described in Tontonoz et al. (1994) Genes Dev. 8: 1224, and provided by Gary Nolan) was used to construct and express full-length murine PPAR ⁇ 2 (Tontonoz et al., supra), human SIRT1, human SIRT1 ⁇ HY (Vaziri et al., supra) and eGFP.
  • Recombinant retroviruses were generated by calcium phosphate transfection of the retroviral constructs into Phoenix ecotropic packaging cells (described in Tontonoz et al., supra, and provided by Gary Nolan), which were maintained in DMEM plus 10% fetal calf serum.
  • C. elegans worms were incubated in the presence or absence of 100 ⁇ M of the SIRT1 activators butein, fisetin, piceatannol and quercetin, and the fat content of the worms measured as described above.
  • the results, which are shown in FIG. 15 indicated that these SIRT1 activators have a similar effect as resveratrol, i.e., they stimulate fat mobilization.
  • quercetin and fisetin reduce fat accumulation at concentrations as low as 10 ⁇ M.
  • C. elegans worms were incubated in the absence (1% v/v DMSO) or presence of 100 ⁇ M 3,5-dihydroxy-4′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene for 24 hours. Significant reduction of fat staining by 3,5-dihydroxy-4′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene was observed ( FIG. 18 ). Animals in L1 were also incubated in the absence (2.5% v/v DMSO) or presence of 100 ⁇ M resveratrol or 100 ⁇ M cis-stilbene for 48 hours. Significant reduction of fat staining by resveratrol is observed. No significant effect on worm fat staining is observed with cis-stilbene compared to the control ( FIG. 19 ). Fat accumulation was visualized with Nile Red, a lipophilic stain, as described in Ashrafi et al., Nature 421: 268-27 (2003).
  • This example shows that resveratrol boosts insulin sensitivity of adipocytes.
  • Adipocytes were treated with TNF-alpha to induce insulin resistance as described in Kabayama et al., Glycobiology 15: 21-29 (2005) and Wu et al., Mol. Cell 3: 151-8 (1999).
  • Treatment with roziglitazone, a positive control increases the uptake of radioactive glucose indicating increased insulin senstivity of the TNF-alpha treated adipocytes.
  • treatment with 5 ⁇ M or 15 ⁇ M resveratrol partially rescued the TNF-alpha treated adipocytes restoring insulin sensitivity in the treated cells.
  • the arrow in FIG. 20 shows the desired effect of increased radioactive-glucose uptake.
  • Resveratrol Like Other AMPK Activators, Can Stimulate Fatty Acid Oxidation in Lipogenic Cells
  • Dyslipogenesis is associated with insulin resistance and the progressive increase in circulating insulin and triglycerides levels, propensity to hypertension, and atherosclerosis that is characteristic of metabolic syndrome [Muller-Wieland, D. and J. Kotzka, SREBP-1: gene regulatory key to syndrome X? Ann N Y Acad Sci, 2002. 967: p. 19-27].
  • Insulin sensitizers such as AICAR (5-aminoimidazole-4-carboxamide-1-beta-D-ribofuranoside) and metformin, activate AMP kinase and mobilize fat from non-adipose cells thereby reducing insulin resistance and serum lipid levels
  • AICAR 5-aminoimidazole-4-carboxamide-1-beta-D-ribofuranoside
  • metformin activate AMP kinase and mobilize fat from non-adipose cells thereby reducing insulin resistance and serum lipid levels
  • AICAR and metformin activate AMPK, which in turn phosphorylates and inhibits acetyl coA carboxylase (ACC) (reviews by Kemp, B. E., et al., Dealing with energy demand: the AMP-activated protein kinase. Trends Biochem Sci, 1999. 24(1): p. 22-5; Kemp, B. E., et al., AMP-activated protein kinase, super metabolic regulator. Biochem Soc Trans, 2003. 31(Pt 1): p. 162-8; Viollet, B., et al., The AMP-activated protein kinase alpha2 catalytic subunit controls whole-body insulin sensitivity.
  • ACC acetyl coA carboxylase
  • Inactivating ACC has the dual effect of inhibiting de novo fat biosynthesis and releasing fatty acid transferases carnitine-palmatoyl transferase-1 CPT-1) and carnitine octanloyl transferase (COT) from end product inhibition by malonyl coA [Morillas, M., et al., Identification of the two histidine residues responsible for the inhibition by malonyl-CoA in peroxisomal carnitine octanoyltransferase from rat liver. FEBS Lett, 2000. 466(1): p. 183-6]. The result is decreased de novo fat biosynthesis and increased fatty acid oxidation FAO with a consequent decrease in cellular fat content.
  • each T25 flask was replaced with a stopper and a 1′ ⁇ 1.5′′ Whatman filter paper soaked with 250 ⁇ l 2N NaOH.
  • Each flask was injected with 2 ml of 6N HCL, placed in a horizontal position for 10 minutes and left standing overnight. The next morning, 1 ml H 2 O and 61 ⁇ l NaOH were added to a glass scintillation vial and the filter papers from each T25 flask were transferred to their respective vial.
  • 10 ml Aquasol was added to each vial and allowed to stand for 2 hours, after which the vials were vortexed to dissolve the NaH 14 CO 2 and counted in the scintillation counter. The results were expressed as nmols/h/106 cells and shown as the fold effect. 14 CO 2 production ranged from 0.3 to 1.8 nmols/h/106 cells. The experiment was repeated three times.

Abstract

Provided herein are methods and compositions for modulating the activity or level of a sirtuin, thereby treating or preventing obesity or an insulin resistance disorder, such as diabetes in a subject. Exemplary methods comprise contacting a cell with a sirtuin activating compound or an inhibitory compound to thereby increase or decrease fat accumulation, respectively.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims the benefit of the priority filing date of U.S. provisional patent application No. 60/533,712 filed on Dec. 29, 2003 and U.S. provisional patent application No. 60/588,643 filed on Jul. 16, 2004; both applications are incorporated herein in their entirety.
    • GOVERNMENT SUPPORT
  • This invention was made with government support under Grant numbers GM068072 and 5RO1-AG19892 awarded by the National Institutes of Health. The government has certain rights in this invention.
    • BACKGROUND
  • Obesity is a chronic condition that is characterized by a body mass index (BMI) over 25. Both congenital and environmental factors, such as exercise and eating habits, contribute to the disease. For instance, the hormone leptin has been shown to be involved in fat accumulation and regulating eating behavior. Several animal models of obesity result from mutations in the leptin and/or leptin receptor gene. In addition to affecting the lifestyle of an individual, obesity can lead to a number of complications and diseases, including insulin resistance, Type II diabetes, gallbladder disease, hypertension, cardiovascular disease, hyperlipidemia, sleep apnea, coronary artery disease, knee osteoarthritis, gout, infertility, breast cancer, endometrial cancer, colon cancer and lower back pain.
  • Diabetes is a disease that shows an acute symptom due to a remarkably high blood sugar or ketoacidosis, or as well as chronic, general metabolic abnormalities arising from a prolonged high blood sugar status or a decrease in glucose tolerance. Both congenital and environmental factors, such as exercise and eating habits, contribute to the disease. The pathogenic causes of diabetes are insulin productive disorders, secretion disorders or reductions in activities and sensitivities of the secreted insulin. Diabetes is largely grouped into the following two types: insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (also known as Type I diabetes) and non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (also known as Type II diabetes). The incidence of Type II diabetes is remarkably increased in obese patients.
  • Treatments for obesity are generally directed to suppressing the appetite of the subject. Whereas a number of appetite suppressants are available (diethylpropion tenuate, mazindol, orlistat, phendimetrazine, phentermine, sibutramine), these compounds may not be effective in all subjects or may be of limited efficacy. Accordingly, new treatments for obesity are needed.
  • A number of treatments for diabetes are well known and include oral hypoglycemic agents such as sulfonylureas that increase insulin secretion (for example, tolbutamide, chlorpropamide and glibenclamide), biguanides (for example, metformin and buformin) that increase glucose uptake and utilization and α-glucosidase inhibitors (for example, acarbose and voglibose). In addition, thiazolidinediones, such as troglitazone, rosiglitazone and pioglitazone, are used to ameliorate insulin-resistance. However, thiazolidinedione intake is usually associated with a weight gain. Thus, there is a still a need for more effective therapies for diabetes.
  • Currently 8% and 15% of adults in the United States are diabetic or obese, respectively. With the number of individuals affected with diabetes, particularly with type II diabetes, and obesity on the increase, there is a dire need for medications that prevent and treat these conditions.
    • SUMMARY
  • Provided herein are methods for treating or preventing obesity and/or insulin resistance disorders, such as diabetes in a subject. In one embodiment, the method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an agent that increases the activity and/or protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 or Sir2. The agent may be a sirtuin-activating compound, or a salt or prodrug thereof. The sirtuin-activating compound preferably stimulates human Sir2, i.e., SIRT1, protein activity. The sirtuin-activating compound preferably is a compound, which has a formula selected from the group consisting of formulas 1-18 or a salt or prodrug thereof. Sirtuin-activating compounds may be flavones, stilbenes, flavanones, isoflavones, catechins, chalcones, tannins and anthocyanidins or analogs or derivatives thereof. Sirtuin-activating compounds may be selected from the group consisting of resveratrol, butein, piceatannol, isoliquiritgenin, fisetin, luteolin, 3,6,3′,4′-tetrahydroxyfalvone, quercetin, and analogs and derivatives thereof. Preferred sirtuin activating compounds also increase the activity and/or protein level of 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase (AMPK).
  • In certain embodiments, the method further comprises administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a second agent that: (i) increases the activity and/or protein level of 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase (AMPK); (ii) increases the activity and/or protein level of a sirtuin; (iii) is an anti-diabetic agent; or (iv) is an anti-obesity agent.
  • Also provided herein are methods for promoting weight gain in a subject, e.g., for treating cachexia comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an a gent that decreases the activity and/or protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 or Sir2. Preferably, the sirtuin-inhibitory compound is a compound selected from the group of compounds represented by formulas 19-21, or a salt or prodrug thereof. Preferred sirtuin inhibitory compounds also decrease or inhibit the activity and/or protein level of 5′-AMP-activating protein kinase (AMPK). In certain embodiments, the method further comprises administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a second agent that: (i) decreases the activity and/or protein level of a sirtuin; (ii) decreases the activity and/or protein level of 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase (AMPK); or (iii) is an agent for promoting weight gain.
  • Also provided is the use of a sirtuin-activating compound, alone or in conjunction with a second agent, for the manufacture of a medicament for treating or preventing an insulin resistance disorder and the use of a sirtuin inhibitory compound, alone or in conjunction with a second agent, for the manufacture of a medicament for promoting weight gain in a subject.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a series of photomicrographs that depict the effect of the sirtuin-activating compound resveratrol at different concentrations to induce fat mobilization as indicated by a decrease in Nile Red staining.
  • FIG. 2 is a series of photomicrographs that depict the effect of resveratrol to induce fat mobilization in a mutant worm with disrupted insulin signaling.
  • FIG. 3 is a series of photomicrographs that depict the effect of the sirtuin-inhibiting compound nicotinamide on fat accumulation. A. Resveratrol stimulates fat mobilization in wild type animals. Worms grown in the presence of vehicle alone, or 10 μM, 50 μM, and 100 μM resveratrol in vehicle were stained with Nile Red. B. Nicotinamide promotes fat accumulation in wild type animals. Nile Red staining in the presence of PBS alone, 1 mM, 5 mM and 10 mM nicotinamide is shown. C. Lower panel, Resveratrol and Nicotinamide have opposing effects on fat content. Effect of vehicle alone, resveratrol (25 μM), Nicotinamide (5 mM) or resveratrol 25 μM and Nicotinamide 5 mM in combination, on fat accumulation as assessed by Nile Red staining.
  • FIGS. 4 a-b is a series of photomicrographs that demonstrate fat content of C. elegans wild-type treated or not with Sir2.1 RNAi and incubated in the presence or absence of resveratrol.
  • FIG. 5A a-d represents a series of photomicrographs of C. elegans incubated with empty RNAi vector (panel a); AMPK RNAi (panel b); COT RNAi (panel c) and DAF-16 RNAi (panel d) in the presence or absence of resveratrol.
  • FIG. 5B represents the amount of Nile-Red staining in C. elegans shown in FIG. 5A.
  • FIG. 6 shows a Western Blot of proteins from C. elegans incubated in the presence or absence (control) of 500 μM AICAR, vehicle 2 (DMSO), 12.5 μM, 25 μM or 50 μM resveratrol and stained for the presence of AMPK, ACC, or tubulin.
  • FIG. 7 shows a Western Blot of proteins incubated in the presence or absence (control) of 500 μM AICAR, DMSO, 100 nM, 500 nM, 2.5 μM, 12.5 μM, 25 μM or 50 μM resveratrol and stained for the presence of P-ACC, P-AMPK, AMPK, or tubulin.
  • FIG. 8 is a Western Blot showing the phosphorylation of ACC in 3T3-L1 adipocytes treated either with ethanol or resveratrol and stained for the presence of P-ACC, SIRT1, or tubulin. In the lanes marked “SF”, cells were left in serum free media overnight before harvesting.
  • FIG. 9 is a Western Blot showing the phosphorylation of ACC in HEP3B human heptoma cells treated with either ethanol or resveratrol and stained for the presence of P-ACC, SIRT1, or tubulin. In the left lane, SIRT1 was knocked down. In the right four lanes, SIRT1 has been overexpressed.
  • FIG. 10 is a Western Blot of proteins from 3T3-L1 adipocytes infected with either a control (GFP) retrovirus, SIRT1, SIRT1 siRNA, or SIRT1 dominant negative (delta HY). Cells were incubated in the presence of AICAR, ethanol, or resveratrol and stained for the presence of P-ACC, ACC, SIRT1, P-AMPK, AMPK, tubulin, or GAPDH. A dose response curve is shown on the far right of the blot.
  • FIG. 11 is a Western Blot showing the effects of resveratrol in the presence or absence of AMPK kinase, LKB1. Mouse embryonic fibroblasts were incubated in the presence of AICAR, ethanol, 50, 100, 200 μM of resveratrol. Blots were stained for the presence of P-ACC, P-AMPK, AMPK, or tubulin as indicated on the left.
  • FIG. 12 shows that resveratrol inhibits lipid accumulation during mammalian adipogenesis. A. 3T3-L1 and NIH3T3 cells were differentiated into adipocytes in the presence of 25 μM, 12.5 μM or 0 μM resveratrol in vehicle (ethanol). After 10 days of differentiation, cells were fixed and stained with Oil red O. Oil red O was extracted from stained cells and quantified by measuring absorbance at 520 nm. B. Oil red O quantitation is shown as fold change relative to the 3T3-L1 sample treated with 0 μm resvratrol.
  • FIG. 13 shows that resveratrol inhibits adipogenesis, and that this is rescued by PPARγ. A marked decrease in PPARγ expression was detected in resveratrol-treated 3T3-L1 cells. In a separate experiment, 3T3-L1 cells were grown in the presence of virus encoding gfp or PPAR-gamma and 25 μM, 12.5 μM or 0 μM resveratrol in vehicle (ethanol). After 8 days of differentiation, cells were fixed and stained with Oil red O.
  • FIG. 14 shows that resveratrol inhibits lipid accumulation and the partial rescue by deacetylase deficient SIRT1. NIH3T3 cells were grown in the presence of virus encoding gfp, SIRT1 or deaceytlase deficient SIRT1. Cells were differentiated into adipocytes in the presence of 25 μM, 12.5 μM or 0 μM resveratrol in vehicle (ethanol). After 8 days of differentiation, cells were fixed and stained with Oil red O. Oil red O was extracted from stained cells and quantified. FIG. 15 shows the effect of polyphenols on C. elegans fat stores. C. elegans in L1 were exposed to Nile Red stain and vehicle (A, 20% v/v DMSO in PBS buffer) or 100 μM resveratrol, butein, fisetin, piceatannol, or quercetin for 48 hours. In each image, the head is positioned towards the bottom.
  • FIG. 16 shows the effect of quercetin on C. elegans fat stores. C. elegans in L1 were exposed to Nile Red and vehicle (20% v/v DMSO) or quercetin at 10 μM, 50 μM and 100 μM for 48 hours. In each image, the head is positioned towards the bottom.
  • FIG. 17 shows the effect of fisetin on C. elegans fat stores. C. elegans in L1 stage were exposed to Nile Red and vehicle (A, 20% v/v DMSO) or fisetin at 10 μM, 50 μM and 100 μM for 48 hours. In each image, the head is positioned towards the bottom.
  • FIG. 18 shows the effect of 3,5-dihydroxy-4′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene on C. elegans fat stores. Animals in L1 were treated with Nile Red stain and (A) 1% v/v DMSO or (B) 100 μM 3,5-dihydroxy-4′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene for 24 hours. In each image, the head is positioned towards the bottom.
  • FIG. 19 compares the effect of resveratrol and cis-stilbene (a resveratrol analogue) on C. elegans fat stores. Animals in L1 were exposed to Nile Red stain and (A) 2.5% v/v DMSO, (B) 100 μM resveratrol or (C) cis-stilbene for 48 hours. In each image, the head is positioned towards the bottom.
  • FIG. 20 shows the effect of resveratrol on TNF-alpha treated adipocytes that are insulin resistant. Lane 1, no treatment; lane 2, TNF-alpha treated; lane 3, TNF-alpha plus 4 μM roziglitazone (positive control); lane 4, TNF-alpha plus 5 μM resveratrol; and Lane 5, TNF-alpha plus 15 μM resveratrol.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Definitions
  • As used herein, the following terms and phrases shall have the meanings set forth below. Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • The singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” include plural reference unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
  • The term “agent” is used herein to denote a chemical compound, a mixture of chemical compounds, a biological macromolecule (such as a nucleic acid, an antibody, a protein or portion thereof, e.g., a peptide), or an extract made from biological materials such as bacteria, plants, fungi, or animal (particularly mammalian) cells or tissues. The activity of such agents may render it suitable as a “therapeutic agent” which is a biologically, physiologically, or pharmacologically active substance (or substances) that acts locally or systemically in a subject.
  • “Sirtuin activation” refers to increasing at least one activity of a sirtuin protein, preferably by at least about 10%, 50%, 100% or more. “Activating a sirtuin protein” refers to the action of producing an activated sirtuin protein, i.e., a sirtuin protein that is capable of performing at least one of its biological activities with an increase of activity of at least about 10%, 50%, 2 fold or more. Biological activities of sirtuin proteins include deacetylation, e.g., of histones and p53; extending lifespan; increasing genomic stability; silencing transcription; and controlling the segregation of oxidized proteins between mother and daughter cells.
  • An “activating compound,” “sirtuin-activating compound,” or a “sirtuin activator” refers to a compound that activates a sirtuin protein or stimulates or increases at least one activity of a sirtuin protein. In certain embodiments, a sirtuin-activating compound may have a formula selected from the group of formulas 1-18.
  • “Sirtuin inhibition” refers to decreasing at least one activity of a sirtuin protein, preferably at least about 10%, 50%, 100% or more.
  • An “inhibitory compound” or “inhibiting compound” or “sirtuin inhibitory compound” refers to a compound that inhibits at least one activity of a sirtuin protein. In certain embodiments, a sirtuin inhibitory compound may have a formula selected from the group consisting of formulas 19-21.
  • A “form that is naturally occurring” when referring to a compound means a compound that is in a form, e.g., a composition, in which it can be found naturally. For example, since resveratrol can be found in red wine, it is present in red wine in a form that is naturally occurring. A compound is not in a form that is naturally occurring if, e.g., the compound has been purified and separated from at least some of the other molecules that are found with the compound in nature. A “naturally occurring compound” refers to a compound that can be found in nature, i.e., a compound that has not been designed by man. A naturally occurring compound may have been made by man or by nature.
  • “Sirtuin protein” refers to a member of the sirtuin deacetylase protein family or preferably to the Sir2 family, which include yeast Sir2 (GenBank Accession No. P53685), C. elegans Sir-2.1 (GenBank Accession No. NP—501912), and human SIRT1 (GenBank Accession No. NM—012238 and NP—036370 (or AF083106), set forth as SEQ ID NOs: 1 and 2, respectively) and SIRT2 (GenBank Accession No. NM—030593 and AF083107) proteins. Other family members include the four additional yeast Sir2-like genes termed “HST genes” (homologues of Sir two) HST1, HST2, HST3 and HST4, and the five other human homologues hSIRT3, hSIRT4, hSIRT5, hSIRT6 and hSIRT7 (Brachmann et al. (1995) Genes Dev. 9: 2888 and Frye et al. (1999) BBRC 260: 273). Preferred sirtuins are those that share more similarities with SIRT1, i.e., hSIRT1, and/or Sir2 than with SIRT2, such as those members having at least part of the N-terminal sequence present in SIRT1 and absent in SIRT2 such as SIRT3 has.
  • A “direct activator” of a sirtuin is a molecule that activates a sirtuin by binding to it. A “direct inhibitor” of a sirtuin is a molecule that inhibits a sirtuin by binding to it.
  • “Diabetes” refers to high blood sugar or ketoacidosis, as well as chronic, general metabolic abnormalities arising from a prolonged high blood sugar status or a decrease in glucose tolerance. “Diabetes” encompasses both the type I and type II (Non Insulin Dependent Diabetes Mellitus or NIDDM) forms of the disease. The risk factors for diabetes include the following factors: waistline of more than 40 inches for men or 35 inches for women, blood pressure of 130/85 mmHg or higher, triglycerides above 150 mg/dl, fasting blood glucose greater than 100 mg/dl or high-density lipoprotein of less than 40 mg/dl in men or 50 mg/dl in women.
  • The term “hyperinsulinemia” refers to a state in an individual in which the level of insulin in the blood is higher than normal.
  • The term “insulin resistance” refers to a state in which a normal amount of insulin produces a subnormal biologic response relative to the biological response in a subject that does not have insulin resistance.
  • An “insulin resistance disorder,” as discussed herein, refers to any disease or condition that is caused by or contributed to by insulin resistance. Examples include: diabetes, obesity, metabolic syndrome, insulin-resistance syndromes, syndrome X, insulin resistance, high blood pressure, hypertension, high blood cholesterol, dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, atherosclerotic disease including stroke, coronary artery disease or myocardial infarction, hyperglycemia, hyperinsulinemia and/or hyperproinsulinemia, impaired glucose tolerance, delayed insulin release, diabetic complications, including coronary heart disease, angina pectoris, congestive heart failure, stroke, cognitive functions in dementia, retinopathy, peripheral neuropathy, nephropathy, glomerulonephritis, glomerulosclerosis, nephrotic syndrome, hypertensive nephrosclerosis some types of cancer (such as endometrial, breast, prostate, and colon), complications of pregnancy, poor female reproductive health (such as menstrual irregularities, infertility, irregular ovulation, polycystic ovarian syndrome (PCOS)), lipodystrophy, cholesterol related disorders, such as gallstones, cholescystitis and cholelithiasis, gout, obstructive sleep apnea and respiratory problems, osteoarthritis, and prevention and treatment of bone loss, e.g. osteoporosis.
  • “Obese” individuals or individuals suffering from obesity are generally individuals having a body mass index (BMI) of at least 25 or greater. Obesity may or may not be associated with insulin resistance.
  • The terms “comprise” and “comprising” are used in the inclusive, open sense, meaning that additional elements may be included.
  • The term “including” is used to mean “including but not limited to”. “Including” and “including but not limited to” are used interchangeably.
  • The term “percent identical” refers to sequence identity between two amino acid sequences or between two nucleotide sequences. Identity can each be determined by comparing a position in each sequence which may be aligned for purposes of comparison. When an equivalent position in the compared sequences is occupied by the same base or amino acid, then the molecules are identical at that position; when the equivalent site occupied by the same or a similar amino acid residue (e.g., similar in steric and/or electronic nature), then the molecules can be referred to as homologous (similar) at that position. Expression as a percentage of homology, similarity, or identity refers to a function of the number of identical or similar amino acids at positions shared by the compared sequences. Expression as a percentage of homology, similarity, or identity refers to a function of the number of identical or similar amino acids at positions shared by the compared sequences. Various alignment algorithms and/or programs may be used, including FASTA, BLAST, or ENTREZ. FASTA and BLAST are available as a part of the GCG sequence analysis package (University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.), and can be used with, e.g., default settings. ENTREZ is available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information, National Library of Medicine, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md. In one embodiment, the percent identity of two sequences can be determined by the GCG program with a gap weight of 1, e.g., each amino acid gap is weighted as if it were a single amino acid or nucleotide mismatch between the two sequences.
  • Other techniques for alignment are described in Methods in Enzymology, vol. 266: Computer Methods for Macromolecular Sequence Analysis (1996), ed. Doolittle, Academic Press, Inc., a division of Harcourt Brace & Co., San Diego, Calif., USA. Preferably, an alignment program that permits gaps in the sequence is utilized to align the sequences. The Smith-Waterman is one type of algorithm that permits gaps in sequence alignments. See Meth. Mol. Biol. 70: 173-187 (1997). Also, the GAP program using the Needleman and Wunsch alignment method can be utilized to align sequences. An alternative search strategy uses MPSRCH software, which runs on a MASPAR computer. MPSRCH uses a Smith-Waterman algorithm to score sequences on a massively parallel computer. This approach improves ability to pick up distantly related matches, and is especially tolerant of small gaps and nucleotide sequence errors. Nucleic acid-encoded amino acid sequences can be used to search both protein and DNA databases.
  • The terms “polynucleotide”, and “nucleic acid” are used interchangeably. They refer to a polymeric form of nucleotides of any length, either deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or analogs thereof. Polynucleotides may have any three-dimensional structure, and may perform any function, known or unknown. The following are non-limiting examples of polynucleotides: coding or non-coding regions of a gene or gene fragment, loci (locus) defined from linkage analysis, exons, introns, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant polynucleotides, branched polynucleotides, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers. A polynucleotide may comprise modified nucleotides, such as methylated nucleotides and nucleotide analogs. If present, modifications to the nucleotide structure may be imparted before or after assembly of the polymer. The sequence of nucleotides may be interrupted by non-nucleotide components. A polynucleotide may be further modified, such as by conjugation with a labeling component. The term “recombinant” polynucleotide means a polynucleotide of genomic, cDNA, semisynthetic, or synthetic origin which either does not occur in nature or is linked to another polynucleotide in a nonnatural arrangement.
  • A “patient,” “individual,” “subject” or “host” refers to either a human or a non-human animal.
  • The term “substantially homologous” when used in connection with amino acid sequences, refers to sequences which are substantially identical to or similar in sequence with each other, giving rise to a homology of conformation and thus to retention, to a useful degree, of one or more biological (including immunological) activities. The term is not intended to imply a common evolution of the sequences.
  • The term “modulation” is art-recognized and refers to regulation (i.e., activation or stimulation), down regulation (i.e., inhibition or suppression) of a response, or the two in combination or apart.
  • The term “prophylactic” or “therapeutic” treatment is art-recognized and refers to administration of a drug to a host. If it is administered prior to clinical manifestation of the unwanted condition (e.g., disease or other unwanted state of the host animal) then the treatment is prophylactic, i.e., it protects the host against developing the unwanted condition, whereas if administered after manifestation of the unwanted condition, the treatment is therapeutic (i.e., it is intended to diminish, ameliorate or maintain the existing unwanted condition or side effects therefrom).
  • The term “mammal” is known in the art, and exemplary mammals include humans, primates, bovines, porcines, canines, felines, and rodents (e.g., mice and rats).
  • The term “bioavailable” when referring to a compound is art-recognized and refers to a form of a compound that allows for it, or a portion of the amount of compound administered, to be absorbed by, incorporated to, or otherwise physiologically available to a subject or patient to whom it is administered.
  • The term “pharmaceutically-acceptable salt” is art-recognized and refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of compounds, including, for example, those contained in compositions described herein.
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” is art-recognized and refers to a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting any subject composition or component thereof from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body. Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the subject composition and its components and not injurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which may serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed o il, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginic acid; (16) pyrogen-free water; (17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer's solution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) phosphate buffer solutions; and (21) other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations.
  • The terms “systemic administration,” “administered systemically,” “peripheral administration” and “administered peripherally” are art-recognized and refer to the administration of a subject composition, therapeutic or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes.
  • The terms “parenteral administration” and “administered parenterally” are art-recognized and refer to modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intra-articulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, and intrasternal injection and infusion.
  • “Transcriptional regulatory sequence” is a generic term used throughout the specification to refer to DNA sequences, such as initiation signals, enhancers, and promoters, which induce or control transcription of protein coding sequences with which they are operable linked. In preferred embodiments, transcription of one of the recombinant genes is under the control of a promoter sequence (or other transcriptional regulatory sequence) which controls the expression of the recombinant gene in a cell-type which expression is intended. It will also be understood that the recombinant gene can be under the control of transcriptional regulatory sequences which are the same or which are different from those sequences which control transcription of the naturally-occurring forms of genes as described herein.
  • A “vector” is a self-replicating nucleic acid molecule that transfers an inserted nucleic acid molecule into and/or between host cells. The term includes vectors that function primarily for insertion of a nucleic acid molecule into a cell, replication of vectors that function primarily for the replication of nucleic acid, and expression vectors that function for transcription and/or translation of the DNA or RNA. Also included are vectors that provide more than one of the above functions. As used herein, “expression vectors” are defined as polynucleotides which, when introduced into an appropriate host cell, can be transcribed and translated into a polypeptide(s). An “expression system” usually connotes a suitable host cell comprised of an expression vector that can function to yield a desired expression product.
  • “Treating” a condition or disease refers to curing as well as ameliorating at least one symptom of the condition or disease.
  • The term “cis” is art-recognized and refers to the arrangement of two atoms or groups around a double bond such that the atoms or groups are on the same side of the double bond. C is configurations are often labeled as (Z) configurations.
  • The term “trans” is art-recognized and refers to the arrangement of two atoms or groups around a double bond such that the atoms or groups are on the opposite sides of a double bond. Trans configurations are often labeled as (E) configurations.
  • The term “covalent bond” is art-recognized and refers to a bond between two atoms where electrons are attracted electrostatically to both nuclei of the two atoms, and the net effect of increased electron density between the nuclei counterbalances the internuclear repulsion. The term covalent bond includes coordinate bonds when the bond is with a metal ion.
  • The term “therapeutic agent” is art-recognized and refers to any chemical moiety that is a biologically, physiologically, or pharmacologically active substance that acts locally or systemically in a subject. The term also means any substance intended for use in the diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment or prevention of disease or in the enhancement of desirable physical or mental development and/or conditions in an animal or human.
  • The term “therapeutic effect” is art-recognized and refers to a local or systemic effect in animals, particularly mammals, and more particularly humans caused by a pharmacologically active substance. The phrase “therapeutically-effective amount” means that amount of such a substance that produces some desired local or systemic effect at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any treatment. The therapeutically effective amount of such substance will vary depending upon the subject and disease or condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease or condition, the manner of administration and the like, which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, certain compositions described herein may be administered in a sufficient amount to produce a desired effect at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to such treatment.
  • The term “synthetic” is art-recognized and refers to production by in vitro chemical or enzymatic synthesis.
  • The term “meso compound” is art-recognized and refers to a chemical compound which has at least two chiral centers but is achiral due to a plane or point of symmetry.
  • The term “chiral” is art-recognized and refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner. A “prochiral molecule” is a molecule which has the potential to be converted to a chiral molecule in a particular process.
  • The term “stereoisomers” is art-recognized and refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space. In particular, “enantiomers” refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposable mirror images of one another. “Diastereomers”, on the other hand, refers to stereoisomers with two or more centers of dissymmetry and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another.
  • Furthermore, a “stereoselective process” is one which produces a particular stereoisomer of a reaction product in preference to other possible stereoisomers of that product. An “enantioselective process” is one which favors production of one of the two possible enantiomers of a reaction product.
  • The term “regioisomers” is art-recognized and refers to compounds which have the same molecular formula but differ in the connectivity of the atoms. Accordingly, a “regioselective process” is one which favors the production of a particular regioisomer over others, e.g., the reaction produces a statistically significant increase in the yield of a certain regioisomer.
  • The term “epimers” is art-recognized and refers to molecules with identical chemical constitution and containing more than one stereocenter, but which differ in configuration at only one of these stereocenters.
  • The term “ED50” is art-recognized. In certain embodiments, ED50 means the dose of a drug which produces 50% of its maximum response or effect, or alternatively, the dose which produces a pre-determined response in 50% of test subjects or preparations. The term “LD50” is art-recognized. In certain embodiments, LD50 means the dose of a drug which is lethal in 50% of test subjects. The term “therapeutic index” is an art-recognized term which refers to the therapeutic index of a drug, defined as LD50/ED50.
  • The term “structure-activity relationship” or “(SAR)” is art-recognized and refers to the way in which altering the molecular structure of a drug or other compound alters its biological activity, e.g., its interaction with a receptor, enzyme, nucleic acid or other target and the like.
  • The term “aliphatic” is art-recognized and refers to a linear, branched, cyclic alkane, alkene, or alkyne. In certain embodiments, aliphatic groups in the present compounds are linear or branched and have from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms.
  • The term “alkyl” is art-recognized, and includes saturated aliphatic groups, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups. In certain embodiments, a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has about 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C1-C30 for straight chain, C3-C30 for branched chain), and alternatively, about 20 or fewer. Likewise, cycloalkyls have from about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and alternatively about 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure. The term “alkyl” is also defined to include halosubstituted alkyls.
  • The term “aralkyl” is art-recognized and refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group (e.g., an aromatic or heteroaromatic group).
  • The terms “alkenyl” and “alkynyl” are art-recognized and refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
  • Unless the number of carbons is otherwise specified, “lower alkyl” refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, but having from one to about ten carbons, alternatively from one to about six carbon atoms in its backbone structure. Likewise, “lower alkenyl” and “lower alkynyl” have similar chain lengths.
  • The term “heteroatom” is art-recognized and refers to an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Illustrative heteroatoms include boron, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, sulfur and selenium.
  • The term “aryl” is art-recognized and refers to 5-, 6- and 7-membered single-ring aromatic groups that may include from zero to four heteroatoms, for example, benzene, naphtalene, anthracene, pyrene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like. Those aryl groups having heteroatoms in the ring structure may also be referred to as “aryl heterocycles” or “heteroaromatics.” The aromatic ring may be substituted at one or more ring positions with such substituents as described above, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aromatic or heteroaromatic moieties, —CF3, —CN, or the like. The term “aryl” also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings (the rings are “fused rings”) wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings may be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls.
  • The terms ortho, meta and para are art-recognized and refer to 1,2-, 1,3- and 1,4-disubstituted benzenes, respectively. For example, the names 1,2-dimethylbenzene and ortho-dimethylbenzene are synonymous.
  • The terms “heterocyclyl” or “heterocyclic group” are art-recognized and refer to 3- to about 10-membered ring structures, alternatively 3- to about 7-membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. Heterocycles may also be polycycles. Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, thiophene, thianthrene, furan, pyran, isobenzofuran, chromene, xanthene, phenoxanthene, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, pyrimidine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phenarsazine, phenothiazine, furazan, phenoxazine, pyrrolidine, oxolane, thiolane, oxazole, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, lactones, lactams such as azetidinones and pyrrolidinones, sultams, sultones, and the like. The heterocyclic ring may be substituted at one or more positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, —CF3, —CN, or the like.
  • The terms “polycyclyl” or “polycyclic group” are art-recognized and refer to two or more rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are “fused rings”. Rings that are joined through non-adjacent atoms are termed “bridged” rings. Each of the rings of the polycycle may be substituted with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, —CF3, —CN, or the like.
  • The term “carbocycle” is art-recognized and refers to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring in which each atom of the ring is carbon.
  • The term “nitro” is art-recognized and refers to —NO2; the term “halogen” is art-recognized and refers to —F, —Cl, —Br or —I; the term “sulfhydryl” is art-recognized and refers to —SH; the term “hydroxyl” means —OH; and the term “sulfonyl” is art-recognized and refers to —SO2 −. “Halide” designates the corresponding anion of the halogens, and “pseudohalide” has the definition set forth on 560 of “Advanced Inorganic Chemistry” by Cotton and Wilkinson.
  • The terms “amine” and “amino” are art-recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines, e.g., a moiety that may be represented by the general formulas:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00001
      • wherein R50, R51 and R52 each independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, —(CH2)m—R61, or R50 and R51, taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; R61 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8. In certain embodiments, only one of R50 or R51 may be a carbonyl, e.g., R50, R51 and the nitrogen together do not form an imide. In other embodiments, R50 and R51 (and optionally R52) each independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, or —(CH2)m—R61. Thus, the term “alkylamine” includes an amine group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl attached thereto, i.e., at least one of R50 and R51 is an alkyl group.
  • The term “acylamino” is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00002
    wherein R50 is as defined above, and R54 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or —(CH2)m—R61, where m and R61 are as defined above.
  • The term “amido” is art recognized as an amino-substituted carbonyl and includes a moiety that may be represented by the general formula:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00003
    wherein R50 and R51 are as defined above. Certain embodiments of amides may not include imides which may be unstable.
  • The term “alkylthio” refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfur radical attached thereto. In certain embodiments, the “alkylthio” moiety is represented by one of —S-alkyl, —S-alkenyl, —S-alkynyl, and —S—(CH2)m—R61, wherein m and R61 are defined above. Representative alkylthio groups include methylthio, ethyl thio, and the like.
  • The term “carbonyl” is art recognized and includes such moieties as may be represented by the general formulas:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00004
    wherein X50 is a bond or represents an oxygen or a sulfur, and R55 and R56 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, —(CH2)m—R61 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, R56 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or —(CH2)m—R61, where m and R61 are defined above. Where X50 is an oxygen and R55 or R56 is not hydrogen, the formula represents an “ester”. Where X50 is an oxygen, and R55 is as defined above, the moiety is referred to herein as a carboxyl group, and particularly when R55 is a hydrogen, the formula represents a “carboxylic acid”. Where X50 is an oxygen, and R56 is hydrogen, the formula represents a “formate”. In general, where the oxygen atom of the above formula is replaced by sulfur, the formula represents a “thiolcarbonyl” group. Where X50 is a sulfur and R55 or R56 is not hydrogen, the formula represents a “thiolester.” Where X50 is a sulfur and R55 is hydrogen, the formula represents a “thiolcarboxylic acid.” Where X50 is a sulfur and R56 is hydrogen, the formula represents a “thiolformate.” On the other hand, where X50 is a bond, and R55 is not hydrogen, the above formula represents a “ketone” group. Where X50 is a bond, and R55 is hydrogen, the above formula represents an “aldehyde” group.
  • The terms “alkoxyl” or “alkoxy” are art-recognized and refer to an alkyl group, as defined above, having an oxygen radical attached thereto. Representative alkoxyl groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, tert-butoxy and the like. An “ether” is two hydrocarbons covalently linked by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an alkyl that renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an alkoxyl, such as may be represented by one of —O-alkyl, —O-alkenyl, —O-alkynyl, —O—(CH2)m—R61, where m and R61 are described above.
  • The term “sulfonate” is art recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00005
    in which R57 is an electron pair, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or aryl.
  • The term “sulfate” is art recognized and includes a moiety that may be represented by the general formula:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00006
    in which R57 is as defined above.
  • The term “sulfonamido” is art recognized and includes a moiety that may be represented by the general formula:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00007
    in which R50 and R56 are as defined above.
  • The term “sulfamoyl” is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00008
    in which R50 and R51 are as defined above.
  • The term “sulfonyl” is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00009
    in which R58 is one of the following: hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl.
  • The term “sulfoxido” is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00010
    in which R58 is defined above.
  • The term “phosphoryl” is art-recognized and may in general be represented by the formula:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00011
    wherein Q50 represents S or O, and R59 represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl or an aryl. When used to substitute, e.g., an alkyl, the phosphoryl group of the phosphorylalkyl may be represented by the general formulas:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00012
    wherein Q50 and R59, each independently, are defined above, and Q51 represents O, S or N. When Q50 is S, the phosphoryl moiety is a “phosphorothioate”.
  • The term “phosphoramidite” is art-recognized and may be represented in the general formulas:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00013
    wherein Q51, R50, R51 and R59 are as defined above.
  • The term “phosphonamidite” is art-recognized and may be represented in the general formulas:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00014
    wherein Q51, R50, R51 and R59 are as defined above, and R60 represents a lower alkyl or an aryl.
  • Analogous substitutions may be made to alkenyl and alkynyl groups to produce, for example, aminoalkenyls, aminoalkynyls, amidoalkenyls, amidoalkynyls, iminoalkenyls, iminoalkynyls, thioalkenyls, thioalkynyls, carbonyl-substituted alkenyls or alkynyls. The definition of each expression, e.g. alkyl, m, n, and the like, when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure.
  • The term “selenoalkyl” is art-recognized and refers to an alkyl group having a substituted seleno group attached thereto. Exemplary “selenoethers” which may be substituted on the alkyl are selected from one of —Se-alkyl, —Se-alkenyl, —Se-alkynyl, and —Se—(CH2)m—R61, m and R61 being defined above.
  • The terms triflyl, tosyl, mesyl, and nonaflyl are art-recognized and refer to trifluoromethanesulfonyl, p-toluenesulfonyl, methanesulfonyl, and nonafluorobutanesulfonyl groups, respectively. The terms triflate, tosylate, mesylate, and nonaflate are art-recognized and refer to trifluoromethanesulfonate ester, p-toluenesulfonate ester, methanesulfonate ester, and nonafluorobutanesulfonate ester functional groups and molecules that contain said groups, respectively.
  • The abbreviations Me, Et, Ph, Tf, Nf, Ts, and Ms represent methyl, ethyl, phenyl, trifluoromethanesulfonyl, nonafluorobutanesulfonyl, p-toluenesulfonyl and methanesulfonyl, respectively. A more comprehensive list of the abbreviations utilized by organic chemists of ordinary skill in the art appears in the first issue of each volume of the Journal of Organic Chemistry; this list is typically presented in a table entitled Standard List of Abbreviations.
  • Certain compounds contained in compositions described herein may exist in particular geometric or stereoisomeric forms. In addition, compounds may also be optically active. Contemplated herein are all such compounds, including cis- and trans-isomers, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, (D)-isomers, (L)-isomers, the racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof. Additional asymmetric carbon atoms may be present in a substituent such as an alkyl group. All such isomers, as well as mixtures thereof, are encompassed herein.
  • If, for instance, a particular enantiomer of a compound is desired, it may be prepared by asymmetric synthesis, or by derivation with a chiral auxiliary, where the resulting diastereomeric mixture is separated and the auxiliary group cleaved to provide the pure desired enantiomers. Alternatively, where the molecule contains a basic functional group, such as amino, or an acidic functional group, such as carboxyl, diastereomeric salts are formed with an appropriate optically-active acid or base, followed by resolution of the diastereomers thus formed by fractional crystallization or chromatographic means well known in the art, and subsequent recovery of the pure enantiomers.
  • It will be understood that “substitution” or “substituted with” includes the implicit proviso that such substitution i s in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction.
  • The term “substituted” is also contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds. Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described herein above. The permissible substituents may be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. Heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms. Compounds are not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds.
  • The chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 67th Ed., 1986-87, inside cover.
  • The term “protecting group” is art-recognized and refers to temporary substituents that protect a potentially reactive functional group from undesired chemical transformations. Examples of such protecting groups include esters of carboxylic acids, silyl ethers of alcohols, and acetals and ketals of aldehydes and ketones, respectively. The field of protecting group chemistry has been reviewed by Greene and Wuts in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (2nd ed., Wiley: New York, 1991).
  • The term “hydroxyl-protecting group” is art-recognized and refers to those groups intended to protect a hydrozyl group against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures and includes, for example, benzyl or other suitable esters or ethers groups known in the art.
  • The term “carboxyl-protecting group” is art-recognized and refers to those groups intended to protect a carboxylic acid group, such as the C-terminus of an amino acid or peptide or an acidic or hydroxyl azepine ring substituent, against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures and includes. Examples for protecting groups for carboxyl groups involve, for example, benzyl ester, cyclohexyl ester, 4-nitrobenzyl ester, t-butyl ester, 4-pyridylmethyl ester, and the like.
  • The term “amino-blocking group” is art-recognized and refers to a group which will prevent an amino group from participating in a reaction carried out on some other functional group, but which can be removed from the amine when desired. Such groups are discussed by in Ch. 7 of Greene and Wuts, cited above, and by Barton, Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry ch. 2 (McOmie, ed., Plenum Press, New York, 1973). Examples of suitable groups include acyl protecting groups such as, to illustrate, formyl, dansyl, acetyl, benzoyl, trifluoroacetyl, succinyl, methoxysuccinyl, benzyl and substituted benzyl such as 3,4-dimethoxybenzyl, o-nitrobenzyl, and triphenylmethyl; those of the formula —COOR where R includes such groups as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, 1-methyl-1-phenylethyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, t-amyl, vinyl, allyl, phenyl, benzyl, p-nitrobenzyl, o-nitrobenzyl, and 2,4-dichlorobenzyl; acyl groups and substituted acyl such as formyl, acetyl, chloroacetyl, dichloroacetyl, trichloroacetyl, trifluoroacetyl, benzoyl, and p-methoxybenzoyl; and other groups such as methanesulfonyl, p-toluenesulfonyl, p-bromobenzenesulfonyl, p-nitrophenylethyl, and p-toluenesulfonyl-aminocarbonyl. Preferred amino-blocking groups are benzyl (—CH2C6H5), acyl [C(O)R1] or SiR13 where R1 is C1-C4 alkyl, halomethyl, or 2-halo-substituted-(C2-C4 alkoxy), aromatic urethane protecting groups as, for example, carbonylbenzyloxy (Cbz); and aliphatic urethane protecting groups such as t-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc) or 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (FMOC).
  • The definition of each expression, e.g. lower alkyl, m, n, p and the like, when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure.
  • The term “electron-withdrawing group” is art-recognized, and refers to the tendency of a substituent to attract valence electrons from neighboring atoms, i.e., the substituent is electronegative with respect to neighboring atoms. A quantification of the level of electron-withdrawing capability is given by the Hammett sigma (σ) constant. This well known constant is described in many references, for instance, March, Advanced Organic Chemistry 251-59 (McGraw Hill Book Company: New York, 1977). The Hammett constant values are generally negative for electron donating groups (σ(P)=−0.66 for NH2) and positive for electron withdrawing groups, (σ(P)=0.78 for a nitro group), σ(P) indicating para substitution. Exemplary electron-withdrawing groups include nitro, acyl, formyl, sulfonyl, trifluoromethyl, cyano, chloride, and the like. Exemplary electron-donating groups include amino, methoxy, and the like.
  • Exemplary Sirtuin-Activating Compounds and Methods of Use
  • The following examples show that activators of sirtuins, such as resveratrol, butein, fisetin, piceatannol, quercetin and 3,5-dihydroxy-4-′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene stimulates fat metabolism by reducing fat accumulation (See examples 1, 8 and 9) as well as inhibit adipogenesis (example 6); that Sir2 and AMPK are necessary for resveratrol mediated fat mobilization (See examples 3 and 4); that resveratrol stimulates AMPK and ACC phosphorylation (See example 5); that resveratrol boosts insulin sensitivity of adipocytes (See example 10) and that resveratrol, like other AMPK activators, can stimulate fatty acid oxidation in lipogenic cells (See example 11).
  • Exemplary sirtuin-activating compounds that activate sirtuins are described in Howitz et al. (2003) Nature 425: 191 and include: for example, resveratrol (3,5,4′-Trihydroxy-trans-stilbene), butein (3,4,2′,4′-Tetrahydroxychalcone), piceatannol (3,5,3′,4′-Tetrahydroxy-trans-stilbene), isoliquiritigenin (4,2′,4′-Trihydroxychalcone), fisetin (3,7,3′,4′-Tetrahyddroxyflavone), quercetin (3,5,7,3′,4′-Pentahydroxyflavone), Deoxyrhapontin (3,5-Dihydroxy-4′-methoxystilbene 3-O-β-D-glucoside); trans-Stilbene; Rhapontin (3,3′,5-Trihydroxy-4′-methoxystilbene 3-O-β-D-glucoside); cis-Stilbene; Butein (3,4,2′,4′-Tetrahydroxychalcone); 3,4,2′4′6′-Pentahydroxychalcone; Chalcone; 7,8,3′,4′-Tetrahydroxyflavone; 3,6,2′,3′-Tetrahydroxyflavone; 4′-Hydroxyflavone; 5,4′-Dihydroxyflavone; 5,7-Dihydroxyflavone; Morin (3,5,7,2′,4′-Pentahydroxyflavone); Flavone; 5-Hydroxyflavone; (−)-Epicatechin (Hydroxy Sites: 3,5,7,3′,4′); (−)-Catechin (Hydroxy Sites: 3,5,7,3′,4′); (−)-Gallocatechin (Hydroxy Sites: 3,5,7,3′,4′,5′) (+)-Catechin (Hydroxy Sites: 3,5,7,3′,4′); 5,7,3′,4′,5′-pentahydroxyflavone; Luteolin (5,7,3′,4′-Tetrahydroxyflavone); 3,6,3′,4′-Tetrahydroxyflavone; 7,3′,4′,5′-Tetrahydroxyflavone; Kaempferol (3,5,7,4′-Tetrahydroxyflavone); 6-Hydroxyapigenin (5,6,7,4′-Tetrahydoxyflavone); Scutellarein); Apigenin (5,7,4′-Trihydroxyflavone); 3,6,2′,4′-Tetrahydroxyflavone; 7,4′-Dihydroxyflavone; Daidzein (7,4′-Dihydroxyisoflavone); Genistein (5,7,4′-Trihydroxyflavanone); Naringenin (5,7,4′-Trihydroxyflavanone); 3,5,7,3′,4′-Pentahydroxyflavanone; Flavanone; Pelargonidin chloride (3,5,7,4′-Tetrahydroxyflavylium chloride); Hinokitiol (b-Thujaplicin; 2-hydroxy-4-isopropyl-2,4,6-cycloheptatrien-1-one); L-(+)-Ergothioneine ((S)-a-Carboxy-2,3-dihydro-N,N,N-trimethyl-2-thioxo-1H-imidazole-4-ethanaminium inner salt); Caffeic Acid Phenyl Ester; MCI-186 (3-Methyl-1-phenyl-2-pyrazolin-5-one); HBED (N,N′-Di-(2-hydroxybenzyl) ethylenediamine-N,N′-diacetic acid-H2O); Ambroxol (trans-4-(2-Amino-3,5-dibromobenzylamino) cyclohexane HCl; and U-83836E ((−)-2-((4-(2,6-di-1-Pyrrolidinyl-4-pyrimidinyl)-1-piperzainyl)methyl)-3,4-dihydro-2,5,7,8-tetramethyl-2H-1-benzopyran-6-ol-2HCl). Analogs and derivatives thereof can also be used.
  • Other sirtuin-activating compounds may have any of formulas 1-18 below. In one embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound is a stilbene or chalcone compound of formula 1:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00015
    wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5 represent H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, NO2, SR, OR, N(R)2, or carboxyl;
      • R represents H, alkyl, or aryl;
      • M represents O, NR, or S;
      • A-B represents a bivalent alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, amido, sulfonamido, diazo, ether, alkylamino, alkylsulfide, or hydrazine group; and
      • n is 0 or 1;
      • provided that when n is 0:
      • when R2 and R4 are OR, and R1, R3, R5, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H, and A-B is alkenyl, R′3 is not Cl, F, —CH3, —CH2CH3, —SMe, NO2, i-propyl, —OMe, or carboxyl;
      • when A-B is alkyl or amido, R2 and R4 are not both OH;
      • when R3 is OR at least one of R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, or R′5 is not H; and
      • R4 is not carboxyl.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as of formula 1 with attendant definitions, wherein the n is 0. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein the n is 1. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein the A-B is ethenyl. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein the A-B is —CH2CH(Me)CH(Me)CH2—. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein the M is 0. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, R′2 and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein the R3, R5, R′2 and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R1, R3, R5, R′2 and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2 and R′2 are OH; R4 is O-β-D-glucoside; and R′3 is OCH3. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2 is OH; R4 is O-β-D-glucoside; and R′3 is OCH3.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is ethenyl; and R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5 are H (trans stilbene). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1; A-B is ethenyl; M is O; and R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5 are H (chalcone). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is ethenyl; R2, R4, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R5, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H (resveratrol). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is ethenyl; R2, R4, R′2 and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R5, R′2, R′4 and R′5 are H (piceatannol). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1; A-B is ethenyl; M is O; R3, R5, R′2 and R′3 are OH; and R1, R2, R4, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H (butein). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1; A-B is ethenyl; M is O; R1, R3, R5, R′2 and R′3 are OH; and R2, R4, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H (3,4,2′,4′,6′-pentahydroxychalcone). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is ethenyl; R2 and R′2 are OH, R4 is O-β-D-glucoside, R′3 is OCH3; and R1, R3, R5, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H (rhapontin). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is ethenyl; R2 is OH, R4 is O-β-D-glucoside, R′3 is OCH3; and R1, R3, R5, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H (deoxyrhapontin). In a further embodiment, a compound is a compound as shown as formula 1 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; A-B is —CH2CH(Me)CH(Me)CH2—; R2, R3, R′2, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R4, R5, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H (NDGA).
  • In another embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound is a flavanone compound of formula 2:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00016
    wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, R′5, and R″ represent H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, NO2, SR, OR, N(R)2, or carboxyl;
      • R represents H, alkyl, or aryl;
      • M represents H2, O, NR, or S;
      • Z represents CR, O, NR, or S; and
      • X represents CR or N; and
      • Y represents CR or N.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are both CH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is H2. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein Z is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R″ is H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R″ is OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R″ is an ester. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R1 is
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00017
    In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, R′5 and R″ are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R4, R′2, R′3, and R″ are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, R′2, R′3, and R″ are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R″ are OH.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is O; Z and 0; R″ is H; and R1, R2, R3, R4, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, R′5 and R″ are H (flavanone). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is O; Z and O; R″ is H; R2, R4, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H (naringenin). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is O; Z and O; R″ is OH; R2, R4, R′2, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H (3,5,7,3′,4′-pentahydroxyflavanone). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is H2; Z and O; R″ is OH; R2, R4, R′2, and R′3, are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, R′4 and R′5 are H (epicatechin). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is H2; Z and O; R″ is OH; R2, R4, R′2, R′3, and R′4 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, and R′5 are H (gallocatechin). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 2 and the attendant definitions, wherein X and Y are CH; M is H2; Z and O; R″ is
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00018
    R2, R4, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R″ are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, and R′5 are H (epigallocatechin gallate).
  • In another embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound is an iso flavanone compound of formula 3:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00019
      • wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, R′5, and R″, represent H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, NO2, SR, OR, N(R)2, or carboxyl;
      • R represents H, alkyl, or aryl;
      • M represents H2, O, NR, or S;
      • Z represents CR, O, NR, or S; and
      • X represents CR or N; and
      • Y represents CR or N.
  • In another embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound is a flavone compound of formula 4:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00020
      • wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5, represent H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, NO2, SR, OR, N(R)2, or carboxyl;
      • R″ is absent or represents H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, NO2, SR, OR, N(R)2, or carboxyl;
      • R represents H, alkyl, or aryl;
      • M represents H2, O, NR, or S;
      • Z represents CR, O, NR, or S; and
      • X represents CR or N when R″ is absent or C when R″ is present.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CR. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein Z is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R″ is H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R″ is OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound of formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R′2, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, R′2, R′3, and R′4 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, R′2, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R3, R′2, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, R′2, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R′2, R′3, and R′4 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R3, R4, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R3, R′1, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2 and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R1, R2, R′2, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R3, R′1, and R′2 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R′3 is OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R4 and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2 and R4 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, R′1, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R4 is OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, R′2, R′3, and R′4 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown ds formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R′2, R′3, and R′4 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein R1, R2, R4, R′2, and R′3 are OH.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; and R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5 are H (flavone). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R2, R′2, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R4, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H (fisetin). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R2, R4, R′2, R′3, and R′4 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, and R's are H (5,7,3′,4′,5′-pentahydroxyflavone). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R2, R4, R′2, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H (luteolin). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C, R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R3, R′2, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R2, R4, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H (3,6,3′,4′-tetrahydroxyflavone). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C, R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R2, R4, R′2, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H (quercetin). In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R2, R′2, R′3, and R′4 are OH; and R1, R3, R4, R′1, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R2, R4, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R2, R3, R4, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′3 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R2, R4, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C, R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R3, R′1, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R2, R4, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein A is CH, R″ is absent, Z is O, M is O; R2 and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R4, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C, R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R1, R2, R′2, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R2, R4, R′3, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R3, R′1, and R′2 are OH; and R1, R2, R4; R′3, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R′3 is OH; and R1, R2, R3, R4, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R4 and R′3 are OH; and R1, R2, R3, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R2 and R4 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R2, R4, R′1, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R4 is OH; and R1, R2, R3, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R2, R4, R′2, R′3, and R′4 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R2, R′2, R′3, and R′4 are OH; and R1, R3, R4, R′1, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 4 and the attendant definitions, wherein X is C; R″ is OH; Z is O; M is O; R1, R2, R4, R′2, and R′3 are OH; and R3, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H.
  • In another embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound is an iso flavone compound of formula 5:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00021
      • wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5, represent H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, NO2, SR, OR, N(R)2, or carboxyl;
      • R″ is absent or represents H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, NO2, SR, OR, N(R)2, or carboxyl;
      • R represents H, alkyl, or aryl;
      • M represents H2, O, NR, or S;
      • Z represents CR, O, NR, or S; and
  • Y represents CR or N when R″ is absent or C when R″ is present.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein Y is CR. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein Y is CH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein Z is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2 and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound of formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, and R′3 are OH.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein Y is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R2 and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R4, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 5 and the attendant definitions, wherein Y is CH; R″ is absent; Z is O; M is O; R2, R4, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H.
  • In another embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound is an anthocyanidin compound of formula 6:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00022
      • wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R′2, R′3, R′4, R′5, and R′6 represent H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, NO2, SR, OR, N(R)2, or carboxyl;
      • R represents H, alkyl, or aryl; and
      • A− represents an anion selected from the following: Cl−, Br−, or I−.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein A− is Cl−. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein R3, R5, R7, and R′4 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein R3, R5, R7, R′3, and R′4 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein R3, R5, R7, R′3, R′4, and R′5 are OH.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein A− is Cl−; R3, R5, R7, and R′4 are OH; and R4, R6, R8, R′2, R′3, R′5, and R′6 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein A− is Cl−; R3, R5, R7, R′3, and R′4 are OH; and R4, R6, R8, R′2, R′5, and R′6 are H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 6 and the attendant definitions, wherein A− is Cl−; R3, R5, R7, R′3, R′4, and R′5 are OH; and R4, R6, R8, R′2, and R′6 are H.
  • Methods for activating a sirtuin protein family member may also comprise contacting the cell with a stilbene, chalcone, or flavone compound represented by formula 7:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00023
      • wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • M is absent or O;
      • R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, and R′5 represent H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, NO2, SR, OR, N(R)2, or carboxyl;
      • Ra represents H or the two Ra form a bond;
      • R represents H, alkyl, or aryl; and
      • n is 0 or 1;
      • provided that when n is 0:
      • when R2 and R4 are OR, and R1, R3, R5, R′1, R′2, R′4, and R′5 are H, R′3 is not Cl, F, —CH3, —CH2CH3, —SMe, NO2, i-propyl, —OMe, or carboxyl;
      • when R3 is OR at least one of R′1, R′2, R′3, R′4, or R′5 is not H; and
      • R4 is not carboxyl.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is absent. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is O. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein Ra is H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein M is O and the two Ra form a bond.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R5 is H. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R5 is OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R1, R3, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R4, R′2, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2, R′2, and R′3 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein R2 and R4 are OH.
  • In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 0; M is absent; Ra is H; R5 is H; R1, R3, and R′3 are OH; and R2, R4, R′1, R2, R′4, and R′5 are OH. In a further embodiment, the compound is a compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1; M is absent; Ra is H; R5 is H; R2, R4, R′2, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H. In a further embodiment, the activating compound is a compound as shown as formula 7 and the attendant definitions, wherein n is 1; M is O; the two Ra form a bond; R5 is OH; R2, R′2, and R′3 are OH; and R1, R3, R4, R′1, R′4, and R′5 are H.
  • Other sirtuin-activating compounds include compounds having a formula selected from the group consisting of formulas 8-10 set forth below.
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00024
      • R═H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl
      • R′=H, halogen, NO2, SR, OR, NR2, alkyl, aryl, or carboxy
        Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00025
      • R═H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl
        Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00026
      • wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • R′=H, halogen, NO2, SR, OR, NR2, alkyl, aryl, or carboxy
      • R═H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl
  • In another embodiment, exemplary sirtuin-activating compounds are isonicotinamide analogs, such as, for example, the isonicotinamide analogs described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,985,848; 6,066,722; 6,228,847; 6,492,347; 6,803,455; and U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2001/0019823; 2002/0061898; 2002/0132783; 2003/0149261; 2003/0229033; 2003/0096830; 2004/0053944; 2004/0110772; and 2004/0181063, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In an exemplary emobidment, sirtuin-activating compounds may be an isonicotinamide analog having any of formulas 11-14 below. In one embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound is an isonicotinamide analog compound of formula 11:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00027
  • Wherein A is a nitrogen-, oxygen-, or sulfur-linked aryl, alkyl, cyclic, or heterocyclic group. The A moieties thus described, optionally have leaving group characteristics. In embodiments encompassed herein, A is further substituted with an electron contributing moiety. B and C are both hydrogen, or one of B or C is a halogen, amino, or thiol group and the other of B or C is hydrogen; and D is a primary alcohol, a hydrogen, or an oxygen, nitrogen, carbon, or sulfur linked to phosphate, a phosphoryl group, a pyrophosphoryl group, or adenosine monophosphate through a phosphodiester or carbon-, nitrogen-, or sulfur-substituted phosphodiester bridge, or to adenosine diphosphate through a phosphodiester or carbon-, nitrogen-, or sulfur-substituted pyrophosphodiester bridge.
  • In one example, A is a substituted N-linked aryl or heterocyclic group, an O-linked aryl or heterocyclic group having the formula —O—Y, or an S-linked aryl or heterocyclic group having the formula —O—Y; both B and C are hydrogen, or one of B or C is a halogen, amino, or thiol group and the other of B or C is hydrogen; and D is a primary alcohol or hydrogen. Nonlimiting preferred examples of A are set forth below, where each R is H or an electron-contributing moiety and Z is an alkyl, aryl, hydroxyl, OZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, amino, NHZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, or NHZ′Z″ where Z′ and Z″ are independently an alkyl or aryl.
  • Examples of A include i-xiv below:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00028
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00029
      • where Y=a group consistent with leaving group function.
  • Examples of Y include, but are not limited to, xv-xxvii below:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00030
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00031
  • Wherein, for i-xxvii, X is halogen, thiol, or substituted thiol, amino or substituted amino, oxygen or substituted oxygen, or aryl or alkyl groups or heterocycles.
  • In certain embodiments, A is a substituted nicotinamide group (i above, where Z is H), a substituted pyrazolo group (vii above), or a substituted 3-carboxamid-imidazolo group (x above, where Z is H). Additionally, both B and C may be hydrogen, or one of B or C is a halogen, amino, or thiol group and the other of B or C is hydrogen; and D is a primary alcohol or hydrogen.
  • In other embodiments, one of B or C may be halogen, amino, or thiol group when the other of B or C is a hydrogen. Furthermore, D may be a hydrogen or an oxygen, nitrogen, carbon, or sulfur linked to phosphate, a phosphoryl group, a pyrophosphoryl group, or adenosine monophosphate through a phosphodiester or carbon-, nitrogen-, or sulfur-substituted phosphodiester bridge, or to adenosine diphosphate through a phosphodiester or carbon-, nitrogen-, or sulfur-substituted pyrophosphodiester bridge. Analogues of adenosine monophosphnte or adenosine diphosphate also can replace the adenosine monophosphate or adenosine diphosphate groups.
  • In some embodiments, A has two or more electron contributing moieties.
  • In other embodiments, a sirtuin-activating compound is an isonicotinamide analog compound of formulas 12, 13, or 14 below.
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00032
    wherein Z is an alkyl, aryl, hydroxyl, OZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, amino, NHZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, or NHZ′Z″ where Z′ and Z″ are independently an alkyl or aryl; E and F are independently H, CH3, OCH3, CH2CH3, NH2, OH, NHCOH, NHCOCH3, N(CH3)2, C(CH3)2, an aryl or a C3-C10 alkyl, preferably provided that, when one of of E or F is H, the other of E or F is not H;
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00033
    wherein G, J or K is CONHZ, Z is an alkyl, aryl, hydroxyl, OZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, amino, NHZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, or NHZ′Z″ where Z′ and Z″ are independently an alkyl or aryl, and the other two of G, J and K is independently CH3, OCH3, CH2CH3, NH2, OH, NHCOH, NHCOCH3;
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00034
    wherein Z is an alkyl, aryl, hydroxyl, OZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, amino, NHZ′ where Z′ is an alkyl or aryl, or NHZ′Z″ where Z′ and Z″ are independently an alkyl or aryl; and L is CH3, OCH3, CH2CH3, NH2, OH, NHCOH, NHCOCH3.
  • In an exemplary embodiment, the compound is formula 12 above, wherein E and F are independently H, CH3, OCH3, or OH, preferably provided that, when one of E or F is H, the other of E or F is not H.
  • In another exemplary embodiment, the compound is β-1′-5-methyl-nicotinamide-2′-deoxyribose, β-D-1′-5-methyl-nico-tinamide-2′-deoxyribofuranoside, β-1′-4,5-dimethyl-nicotinamide-2′-de-oxyribose or β-D-1′-4,5-dimethyl-nicotinamide-2′-deoxyribofuranoside.
  • In yet another embodiment, the compound is β-1′-5-methyl-nicotinamide-2′-deoxyribose.
  • Without being bound to any particular mechanism, it is believed that the electron-contributing moiety on A stabilizes the compounds of the invention such that they are less susceptible to hydrolysis from the rest of the compound. This improved chemical stability improves the value of the compound, since it is available for action for longer periods of time in biological systems due to resistance to hydrolytic breakdown. The skilled artisan could envision many electron-contributing moieties that would be expected to serve this stabilizing function. Nonlimiting examples of suitable electron contributing moieties are methyl, ethyl, O-methyl, amino, NMc2, hydroxyl, CMc3, aryl and alkyl groups. Preferably, the electron-contributing moiety is a methyl, ethyl, O-methyl, amino group. In the most preferred embodiments, the electron-contributing moiety is a methyl group.
  • The compounds of formulas 11-14 are useful both in free form and in the form of salts. The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” is intended to apply to non-toxic salts derived from inorganic or organic acids and includes, for example, salts derived from the following acids: hydrochloric, sulfuric, phosphoric, acetic, lactic, fumaric, succinic, tartaric, gluconic, citric, methanesulfonic, and p-toluenesulfonic acids.
  • Also provided are compounds of formulas 11-14 that are the tautomers, pharmaceutically-acceptable salts, esters, and pro-drugs of the inhibitor compounds disclosed herein.
  • The biological availability of the compounds of formulas 11-14 can be enhanced by conversion into a pro-drug form. Such a pro-drug can have improved lipophilicity relative to the unconverted compound, and this can result in enhanced membrane permeability. One particularly useful form of pro-drug is an ester derivative. Its utility relies upon the action of one or more of the ubiquitous intracellular lipases to catalyse the hydrolysis of ester groups, to release the active compound at or near its site of action. In one form of pro-drug, one or more hydroxy groups in the compound can be O-acylated, to make an acylate derivative.
  • Pro-drug forms of a 5-phosphate ester derivative of compounds of formulas 11-14 can also be made. These may be particularly useful, since the anionic nature of the 5-phosphate may limit its ability to cross cellular membranes. Conveniently, such a 5-phosphate derivative can be converted to an uncharged bis(acyloxymethyl) ester derivative. The utility of such a pro-drug relies upon the action of one or more of the ubiquitous intracellular lipases to catalyse the hydrolysis of ester groups, releasing a molecule of formaldehyde and a compound of the present invention at or near its site of action. Specific examples of the utility of, and general methods for making, such acyloxymethyl ester pro-drug forms of phosphorylated carbohydrate derivatives have been described (Kang et al., 1998; Jiang et al., 1998; Li et al., 1997; Kruppa et al., 1997).
  • In another embodiment, exemplary sirtuin-activating compounds are O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analogs, including 2′-O-acetyl-ADP-ribose and 3′-O-acetyl-ADP-ribose, and analogs thereof. Exemplary O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analogs are described, for example, in U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2004/0053944; 2002/0061898; and 2003/0149261, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In an exemplary embodiment, sirtuin-activating compounds may be an O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analog having any of formulas 15-18 below. In one embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound is an O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analog compound of formula 15:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00035
    wherein:
      • A is selected from N, CH and CR, where R is selected from halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, aralkyl and aryl, OH, NH2, NHR1, NR1R2 and SR3, where R1, R2 and R3 are each optionally substituted alkyl, aralkyl or aryl groups;
      • B is selected from OH, NH2, NHR4, H and halogen, where R4 is an optionally substituted alkyl, aralkyl or aryl group;
      • D is selected from OH, NH2, NHR5, H, halogen and SCH3, where R5 is an optionally substituted alkyl, aralkyl or aryl group;
      • X and Y are independently selected from H, OH and halogen, with the proviso that when one of X and Y is hydroxy or halogen, the other is hydrogen;
      • Z is OH, or, when X is hydroxy, Z is selected from hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, SQ and OQ, where Q is an optionally substituted alkyl, aralkyl or aryl group; and
  • W is OH or H, with the proviso that when W is OH, then A is CR where R is as defined above;
  • or a tautomer thereof; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; or an ester thereof; or a prodrug thereof.
  • In certain embodiments, when B is NHR4 and/or D is NHR5, then R4 and/or R5 are C1-C4 alkyl.
  • In other embodiments, when one or more halogens are present they are chosen from chlorine and fluorine.
  • In another embodiment, when Z is SQ or OQ, Q is C1-C5 alkyl or phenyl.
  • In an exemplary embodiment, D is H, or when D is other than H, B is OH.
  • In another embodiment, B is OH, D is H, OH or NH2, X is OH or H, Y is H, most preferably with Z as OH, H, or methylthio, especially OH.
  • In certain embodiments W is OH, Y is H, X is OH, and A is CR where R is methyl or halogen, preferably fluorine.
  • In other embodiments, W is H, Y is H, X is OH and A is CH.
  • In other embodiments, a sirtuin-activating compound is an O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analog compound of formula 16:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00036
      • wherein A, X, Y, Z and R are defined for compounds of formula (15) where first shown above; E is chosen from CO2H or a corresponding salt form, CO2R, CN, CONH2, CONHR or CONR2; and G is chosen from NH2, NHCOR, NHCONHR or NHCSNHR; or a tautomer thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an ester thereof, or a prodrug thereof.
  • In certain embodiments, E is CONH2 and G is NH2.
  • In other embodiments, E is CONH2, G is NH2, X is OH or H, is H, most preferable with Z as OH, H or methylthio, especially OH.
  • Exemplary sirtuin-activating compounds include the following:
    • (1S)-1,4-dideoxy-1-C-(4-hydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-C-(2-amino-4-hydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-dideoxy-1,4-imino-D-ribitol
    • (1R)-1-C-(4-hydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-1,2,4-trideoxy-D-erythro-pentitol
    • (1S)-1-C-(4-hydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-1,4,5-trideoxy-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1,4-dideoxy-1-C-(2,4-dihydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-D-methylthio-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1,4-dideoxy-1-C-(2,4-dihydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-D-ribitol
    • (1R)-1-C-(2,4-dihydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-1,2,4-trideoxy-D-erthro-pentitol
    • (1S)-1-C-(2,4-dihydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-1,4,5-trideoxy-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1,4-dideoxy-1-C-(2,4-dihydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-5-ethylthio-D-ribitol
    • (1R)-1-C-(2-amino-4-hydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-1,2,4-trideoxy-D-erythro-pentitol
    • (1S)-1-C-(2-amino-4-hydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-1,4,5-trideoxy-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1-C-(2-amino-4-hydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-dideoxy-1,4-imino-5-methylthio-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1,4-dideoxy-1-C-(7-hydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-imino-D-ribitol
    • (1R)-1-C-(7-hydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-imino-1,2,4-trideoxy-D-erythro-pentitol
    • (1S)-1-C-(7-hydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-imino-1,4,5-trideoxy-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1,4-dideoxy-1-C-(7-hydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-imino-5-ethylthio-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1,4-dideoxy-1-C-(5,7-dihydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-imino-D-ribitol
    • (1R)-1-C-(5,7-dihydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-imino-1,2,4-trideoxy-D-erythro-pentitol
    • (1S)-1-C-(5,7-dihydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-imino-1,4,5-trideoxy-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1,4-dideoxy-1-C-(5,7-dihydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-imino-5-methylthio-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1-C-(5-amino-7-hydroxypyiazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-dideoxy-1,4-imino-D-ribitol
    • (1R)-1-C-(S-amino-7-hydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-imino-1,2,4-trideoxy-D-erythro-pentitol
    • (1S)-1-C-(5-amino-7-hydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-imino-1,4,5-trideoxy-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1-C-(5-amino-7-hydroxypyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)-1,4-dideoxy-1,4-imino-5-methylthio-D-ribitol
    • (1S)-1-C-(3-amino-2-carboxamido-4-pyrroly)-1,4-dideoxy-1,4-imino-D-ribitol.
    • (1S)-1,4-dideoxy-1-C-(4-hydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-D-ribitol 5-phosphate
    • (1S)-1-C-(2-amino-4-hydroxypyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidin-7-yl)-1,4-imino-D-ribitol 5-phosphate
    • (1S)-1-C-(3-amino-2-carboxamido-4-pyrrolyl)-1,4-dideoxy-1,4-imino-D-ribitol
  • In yet other embodiments, sirtuin-activating compounds are O-acetyl-ADP-ribose analog compounds of formula 17 and 18, their tautomers and pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00037
  • The biological availability of a compound (15) or formula (16) can be enhanced by conversion into a pro-drug form. Such a pro-drug can have improved lipophilicity relative to the compound of formula (15) or formula (16), and this can result in enhanced membrane permeability. One particularly useful form of a pro-drug is an ester derivative. Its utility relies upon the action of one or more of the ubiquitous intracellular lipases to catalyse the hydrolysis of these ester group(s), to release the compound of formula (15) and formula (16) at or near its site of action.
  • In one form of a prodrug, one or more of the hydroxy groups in a compound of formula (15) or formula (16) can be O-acylated, to make, for example a 5-O-butyrate or a 2,3-di-O-butyrate derivative.
  • Prodrug forms of 5-phosphate ester derivative of a compounds of formula (15) or formula (16) can also be made and may be particularly useful, since the anionic nature of the 5-phosphate may limit its ability to cross cellular membranes. Conveniently, such a 5-phosphate derivative can be converted to an uncharged bis(acyloxymethyl) ester derivative. The utility of such a pro-drug relies upon the action of one or more of the ubiquitous intracellular lipases to catalyse the hydrolysis of these ester group(s), releasing a molecule of formaldehyde and the compound of formula (15) or formula (16) at or near its site of action.
  • In an exemplary embodiment, analogs of 2′-AADPR or 3′-AADPR that are designed to have increased stability from esterase action through the use of well-known substitutes for ester oxygen atoms that are subject to esterase attack. The esterase-labile oxygen atoms in 2′-AADPR and 3′-AADPR would be understood to be the ester oxygen linking the acetate group with the ribose, and the ester oxygen between the two phosphorus atoms. As is known in the art, substitution of either or both of these ester oxygen atoms with a CF2, a NH, or a S would be expected to provide a 2′-AADPR or 3′-AADPR analog that is substantially more stable due to increased resistance to esterase action.
  • Thus, in some embodiments, the invention is directed to analogs 2′-O-acetyl-ADP-ribose or 3′-O-acetyl-ADP-ribose exhibiting increased stability in cells. The preferred analogs comprise a CF2, a NH, or a S instead of the acetyl ester oxygen or the oxygen between two phosphorus atoms. The most preferred substitute is CF2. Replacement of the acetyl ester oxygen is particularly preferred. In other preferred embodiments, both the ester oxygen and the oxygen between the two phosphorus atoms are independently substituted with a CF2, a NH, or a S.
  • Also included are pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts and complexes of the sirtuin-activating compounds of formulas 1-10. described herein. In cases wherein the compounds may have one or more chiral centers, unless specified, the compounds contemplated herein may be a single stereoisomer or racemic mixtures of stereoisomers.
  • In cases in which the sirtuin-activating compounds have unsaturated carbon-carbon double bonds, both the c is (Z) and trans (E) isomers are contemplated herein. In cases wherein the compounds may exist in tautomeric forms, such as keto-enol tautomers, such as
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00038
    each tautomeric form is contemplated as being included within the methods presented herein, whether existing in equilibrium or locked in one form by appropriate substitution with R′. The meaning of any substituent at any one occurrence is independent of its meaning, or any other substituent's meaning, at any other occurrence.
  • Also included in the methods presented herein are prodrugs of the sirtuin-activating compounds of formulas 1-10. described herein. Prodrugs are considered to be any covalently bonded carriers that release the active parent drug in vivo.
  • Analogs and derivatives of the above sirtuin-activating compounds described herein can also be used for activating a member of the sirtuin protein family. For example, derivatives or analogs may make the compounds more stable or improve their ability to traverse cell membranes or being phagocytosed or pinocytosed. Exemplary derivatives include glycosylated derivatives, as described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 6,361,815 for resveratrol. Other derivatives of resveratrol include cis- and trans-resveratrol and conjugates thereof with a saccharide, such as to form a glucoside (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,414,037). Glucoside polydatin, referred to as piceid or resveratrol 3-O-beta-D-glucopyranoside, can also be used. Saccharides to which compounds may be conjugated include glucose, galactose, maltose, lactose and sucrose. Glycosylated stilbenes are further described in Regev-Shoshani et al. Biochemical J. (published on Apr. 16, 2003 as BJ20030141). Other derivatives of compounds described herein are esters, amides and prodrugs. Esters of resveratrol are described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 6,572,882. Resveratrol and derivatives thereof can be prepared as described in the art, e.g., in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,414,037; 6,361,815; 6,270,780; 6,572,882; and Brandolini et al. (2002) J. Agric. Food. Chem. 50: 7407. Derivatives of hydroxyflavones are described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 4,591,600. Resveratrol and other activating compounds can also be obtained commercially, e.g., from Sigma.
  • In certain embodiments, if a sirtuin-activating compound occurs naturally, it may be at least partially isolated from its natural environment prior to use. For example, a plant polyphenol may be isolated from a plant and partially or significantly purified prior to use in the methods described herein. An activating compound may also be prepared synthetically, in which case it would be free of other compounds with which it is naturally associated. In an illustrative embodiment, an activating composition comprises, or an activating compound is associated with, less than about 50%, 10%, 1%, 0.1%, 10-2% or 10-3% of a compound with which it is naturally associated.
  • In certain embodiments, a certain biological function, e.g., reducing body weight, is modulated by any one of a sirtuin-activating compound of a genus of compounds (e.g., having formula I), with the proviso that the genus does not include one or more specific compounds. For example, in certain embodiments, a sirtuin activator-activating compound may be any compound that is capable of increasing the level of expression and/or activity of a sirtuin protein with the proviso that the compound is not resveratrol, a flavone, or any other compound specifically cited herein or any other compound that has been shown to have an activating effect on a sirtuin protein prior to the priority date of this application. In an exemplary embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound may be a compound of any one of formulas 1-18 with the proviso that the compound is not resveratrol, a flavone or, or any of the other compounds compound specifically cited herein, or any other compound which has been shown to have an activating effect on a sirtuin protein prior to the priority date of this application. In an exemplary embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound does not include any of the compounds cited in U.S. Pat. No. 6,410,596 or 6,552,085, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. For example, in one embodiment, a sirtuin-activating compound does not include a compound having formula 22 as set forth below:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00039
    wherein,
      • A is selected from the group consisting of a single bond and a double bond in trans conformation;
      • R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, C1-6 alkoxy, COOH, and COOC1-6 alkyl;
      • R2 is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, and C1-10 alkoxy;
      • R3 is selected from the group consisting of H, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, and C1-8 cycloalkyl;
      • R4 is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, and C1-10 alkoxy;
      • R5 are selected from the group consisting of H, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, and C1-8 cycloalkyl;
      • R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, C1-6 alkoxy, COOH, and COOC1-6 alkyl;
      • R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, C1-6 alkoxy, COOH, and COOC1-6 alkyl; and
      • wherein at least one of R3 and R5 is selected from the group consisting of C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl; and C1-8 cycloalkyl;
  • In certain embodiments, the subject sirtuin activators, such as SIRT1 activators, do not have any substantial ability to inhibit P13-kinase, inhibit aldoreductase and/or inhibit tyrosine protein kinases at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin, e.g., SIRT1. For instance, in preferred embodiments the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for inhibition of one or more of aldoreductase and/or tyrosine protein kinases, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less. Methods for assaying P13-Kinase activity, aldose reductase activity, and tyrosine kinase activity are well known in the art and kits to perform such assays may be purchased commercially. See e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2003/0158212 for P13-kinase assays; U.S. Patent Publication No. 2002/20143017 for aldose reductase assays; tyrosine kinase assay kits may be purchased commercially, for example, from Promega (Madison, Wis.; world wide web at promega.com), Invitrogen (Carlsbad, Calif.; world wide web at invitrogen.com) or Molecular Devices (Sunnyvale, Calif.; world wide web at moleculardevices.com).
  • In certain embodiments, the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to transactivate EGFR tyrosine kinase activity at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin. For instance, in preferred embodiments the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for transactivating EGFR tyrosine kinase activity, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less. Methods for assaying transactivation of EGFR tyrosine kinase activity are well known in the art, see e.g., Pai et al. Nat. Med. 8: 289-93 (2002) and Vacca et al. Cancer Research 60: 5310-5317 (2000).
  • In certain embodiments, the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to cause coronary dilation at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin. For instance, in preferred embodiments the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for coronary dilation, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less. Methods for assaying vasodilation are well known in the art, see e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2004/0236153.
  • In certain embodiments, the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial spasmolytic activity at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin. For instance, in preferred embodiments the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for spasmolytic effects (such as on gastrointestinal muscle), and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less. Methods for assaying spasmolytic activity are well known in the art, see e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2004/0248987.
  • In certain embodiments, the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to inhibit hepatic cytochrome P450 1B1 (CYP) at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin. For instance, in preferred embodiments the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for inhibition of P450 1B1, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less. Methods for assaying cytochrome P450 activity are well known in the art and kits to perform such assays may be purchased commercially. See e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,420,131 and 6,335,428 and Promega (Madison, Wis.; world wide web at promega.com).
  • In certain embodiments, the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to inhibit nuclear factor-kappaB (NF-κB) at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin. For instance, in preferred embodiments the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for inhibition of NF-κB, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less. Methods for assaying NF-κB activity are well known in the art and kits to perform such assays may be purchased commercially (e.g., from Oxford Biomedical Research (Ann Arbor, Mich.; world wide web at oxfordbiomed.com)).
  • In certain embodiments, the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to inhibit a histone deacetylase (HDACs) class I, a HDAC class II, or HDACs I and II, at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin. For instance, in preferred embodiments the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for inhibition of an HDAC I and/or HDAC II, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less. Methods for assaying HDAC I and/or HDAC II activity are well known in the art and kits to perform such assays may be purchased commercially. See e.g., BioVision, Inc. (Mountain View, Calif.; world wide web at biovision.com) and Thomas Scientific (Swedesboro, N.J.; world wide web at tomassci.com).
  • In certain embodiments, the subject SIRT1 activators do not have any substantial ability to activate SIRT1 orthologs in lower eukaryotes, particularly yeast or human pathogens, at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of human SIRT1. For instance, in preferred embodiments the SIRT1 activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating human SIRT1 deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for activating yeast Sir2 (such as Candida, S. cerevisiae, etc), and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • In certain embodiments, the sirtuin activating compounds may have the ability to activate one or more sirtuin protein homologs, such as, for example, one or more of human SIRT1, SIRT2, SIRT3, SIRT4, SIRT5, SIRT6, or SIRT7. In other embodiments, a SIRT1 activator does not have any substantial ability to activate other sirtuin protein homologs, such as, for example, one or more of human SIRT2, SIRT3, SIRT4, SIRT5, SIRT6, or SIRT7, at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of human SIRT1. For instance, the SIRT1 activator may be chosen to have an EC50 for activating human SIRT1 deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for activating one or more of human SIRT2, SIRT3, SIRT4, SIRT5, SIRT6, or SIRT7, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less.
  • In certain embodiments, SIRT3 and SIRT4 modulators may be used to modulate fat mobilization. For example, SIRT3 and/or SIRT4 activators may be used to induce fat mobilization and may be used to treat, e.g., obesity and insulin resistance disorders.
  • In other embodiments, the subject sirtuin activators do not have any substantial ability to inhibit protein kinases; to phosphorylate mitogen activated protein (MAP) kinases; to inhibit the catalytic or transcriptional activity of cyclo-oxygenases, such as COX-2; to inhibit nitric oxide synthase (iNOS); or to inhibit platelet adhesion to type I collagen at concentrations (e.g., in vivo) effective for activating the deacetylase activity of the sirtuin. For instance, in preferred embodiments, the sirtuin activator is chosen to have an EC50 for activating sirtuin deacetylase activity that is at least 5 fold less than the EC50 for performing any of these activities, and even more preferably at least 10 fold, 100 fold or even 1000 fold less. Methods for assaying protein kinase activity, cyclo-oxygenase activity, nitric oxide synthase activity, and platelet adhesion activity are well known in the art and kits to perform such assays may be purchased commercially. See e.g., Promega (Madison, Wis.; world wide web at promega.com), Invitrogen (Carlsbad, Calif.; world wide web at invitrogen.com); Molecular Devices (Sunnyvale, Calif.; world wide web at moleculardevices.com) or Assay Designs (Ann Arbor, Mich.; world wide web at assaydesigns.com) for protein kinase assay kits; Amersham Biosciences (Piscataway, N.J.; world wide web at amershambiosciences.com) for cyclo-oxygenase assay kits; Amersham Biosciences (Piscataway, N.J.; world wide web at amershambiosciences.com) and R&D Systems (Minneapolis, Minn.; world wide web at mdsystems.com) for nitric oxide synthase assay kits; and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,321,010; 6,849,290; and 6,774,107 for platelet adhesion assays.
  • The sirtuin-activitating compounds described herein may be taken alone or in combination with other compounds. The other compounds may be other sirtuin and/or AMPK activators. For example, Longevinex™, which is a red wine extract, and contains, in addition to resveratrol, other sirtuin activators, such as quercetin, is a particularly potent agent for mobilizing fat. Longevinex can be obtained on the world wide web at www.longevinex.com.
  • A combination drug regimen may also include drugs or compounds for the treatment or prevention of obesity and/or diabetes.
  • In an exemplary embodiment, sirtuin-activating compounds may be administered as a combination therapy. For example, for reducing weight, preventing weight gain, or treatment or prevention of obesity, one or more sirtuin-activating compounds of formulas 1-10 may be used in combination with the following “anti-obesity agents”: phenylpropanolamine, ephedrine, pseudoephedrine, phentermine, a cholecystokinin-A agonist, a monoamine reuptake inhibitor (such as sibutramine), a sympathomimetic agent, a serotonergic agent (such as dexfenfluramine or fenfluramine), a dopamine agonist (such as bromocriptine), a melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor agonist or mimetic, a melanocyte-stimulating hormone analog, a cannabinoid receptor antagonist, a melanin concentrating hormone antagonist, the OB protein (leptin), a leptin analog, a leptin receptor agonist, a galanin antagonist or a GI lipase inhibitor or decreaser (such as orlistat). Other anorectic agents include bombesin agonists, dehydroepiandrosterone or analogs thereof, glucocorticoid receptor agonists and antagonists, orexin receptor antagonists, urocortin binding protein antagonists, agonists of the glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor such as Exendin and ciliary neurotrophic factors such as Axokine.
  • Alternatively, one or more sirtuin-activating compounds of formulas 1-10 may be used in combination with the following “anti-diabetic agents”: an aldose reductase inhibitor, a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor, a sorbitol dehydrogenase inhibitor, a protein tyrosine phosphatase 1B inhibitor, a dipeptidyl protease inhibitor, insulin (including orally bioavailable insulin preparations), an insulin mimetic, metformin, acarbose, a peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor-y (PPAR-y) ligand such as troglitazone, rosaglitazone, pioglitazone or GW-1929, a sulfonylurea, glipazide, glyburide, or chlorpropamide wherein the amounts of the first and second compounds result in a therapeutic effect. Other anti-diabetic agents include a glucosidase inhibitor, a glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1), insulin, a PPAR α/γ dual agonist, a meglitimide and an αP2 inhibitor. In an exemplary embodiment, an anti-diabetic agent may be a dipeptidyl peptidase IV (DP-IV or DPP-IV) inhibitor, such as, for example LAF237 from Novartis (NVP DPP728; 1-[[[2-[(5-cyanopyridin-2-yl)amino]ethyl]amino]acetyl]-2-cyano-(S)-pyrrolidine) or MK-04301 from Merck (see e.g., Hughes et al., Biochemistry 38: 11597-603 (1999)).
  • In certain embodiments, one or more sirtuin-activating compounds may be directed specifically to a certain tissue (e.g., liver) rather than the whole body. Tissue specific treatments may be used to treat, e.g., obesity and insulin resistance disorder.
  • In certain embodiments the methods are useful for preventing fat accumulation in cells with lipogenic capacity, e.g. liver, pancreas and muscle cells.
  • Methods for reducing or preventing fat accumulation in a cell may also comprise increasing the protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 in a human cell, Sir2 in a yeast cell, Sir2.1 in C. elegans or a homologue of any of these sirtuins in other organisms. Increasing protein levels can be achieved by introducing into a cell one or more copies of a nucleic acid that encodes a sirtuin. For example, the level of SIRT1 can be increased in a mammalian cell by introducing into the mammalian cell a nucleic acid encoding SIRT1, e.g., having the amino acid sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 2. The nucleic acid may be under the control of a promoter that regulates the expression of the SIRT1 nucleic acid. Alternatively, the nucleic acid may be introduced into the cell at a location in the genome that is downstream of a promoter. Methods for increasing the level of a protein using these methods are well known in the art. Exemplary methods are described in the Examples.
  • A nucleic acid that is introduced into a cell to increase the protein level of a sirtuin may encode a protein that is at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to the sequence of a sirtuin, e.g., SEQ ID NO: 2. For example, the nucleic acid encoding the protein may be at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO: 1. The nucleic acid may also be a nucleic acid that hybridizes, preferably under stringent hybridization conditions, to a nucleic acid encoding a wild-type sirtuin, e.g., SEQ ID NO: 1. Stringent hybridization conditions may include hybridization and a wash in 0.2×SSC at 65° C. When using a nucleic acid that encodes a protein that is different from a wild-type sirtuin protein, such as a protein that is a fragment of a wild-type sirtuin, the protein is preferably biologically active, e.g., is capable of deacetylation. It is only necessary to express in a cell a portion of the sirtuin that is biologically active. For example, a protein that differs from wild-type SIRT1 having SEQ ID NO: 2, preferably contains the core structure thereof. The core structure sometimes refers to amino acids 62-293 of SEQ ID NO: 2, which are encoded by nucleotides 237 to 932 of SEQ ID NO: 1, which encompasses the NAD binding as well as the substrate binding domains. The core domain of SIRT1 may also refer to about amino acids 261 to 447 of SEQ ID NO: 2, which are encoded by nucleotides 834 to 1394 of SEQ ID NO: 1; to about amino acids 242 to 493 of SEQ ID NO: 2, which are encoded by nucleotides 777 to 1532 of SEQ ID NO: 1; or to about amino acids 254 to 495 of SEQ ID NO: 2, which are encoded by nucleotides 813 to 1538 of SEQ ID NO: 1. Whether a protein retains a biological function, e.g., deacetylation capabilities, can be determined according to methods known in the art.
  • Methods for increasing sirtuin protein levels also include methods for stimulating the transcription of genes encoding sirtuins, methods for stabilizing the corresponding mRNAs, methods, and other methods known in the art.
  • Exemplary Sirtuin Inhibitory Compounds and Methods of Use
  • The Examples show that sirtuin inhibitory agents, such as nicotinamide, increase fat accumulation in C. elegans (See example 2).
  • Sirtuin inhibitory compounds include compounds that inhibit the activity of a class III histone deacetylase, such as a sirtuin, and include for example, nicotinamide (NAM), suranim; NF023 (a G-protein antagonist); NF279 (a purinergic receptor antagonist); Trolox (6-hydroxy-2,5,7,8,tetramethylchroman-2-carboxylic acid); (−)-epigallocatechin (hydroxy on sites 3,5,7,3′,4′, 5′); (−)-epigallocatechin (hydroxy on sites 3,5,7,3′,4′,5′); (−)-epigallocatechin gallate (Hydroxy sites 5,7,3′,4′,5′ and gallate ester on 3); cyanidin choloride (3,5,7,3′,4′-pentahydroxyflavylium chloride); delphinidin chloride (3,5,7,3′,4′,5′-hexahydroxyflavylium chloride); myricetin (cannabiscetin; 3,5,7,3′,4′,5′-hexahydroxyflavone); 3,7,3′,4′,5′-pentahydroxyflavone; and gossypetin (3,5,7,8,3′,4′-hexahydroxyflavone), all of which are further described in Howitz et al. (2003) Nature 425: 191. Other inhibitors, such as sirtinol and splitomicin, are described in Grozinger et al. (2001) J. Biol. Chem. 276: 38837, Dedalov et al. (2001) PNAS 98: 15113 and Hirao et al. (2003) J. Biol. Chem 278: 52773. Analogs and derivatives of these compounds can also be used.
  • Yet other sirtuin inhibitory compounds may have any one of the following formulas:
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00040
      • wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • L represents O, NR, or S;
      • R represents H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl;
      • R′ represents H, halogen, NO2, SR, SO3, OR, NR2, alkyl, aryl, or carboxy;
      • a represents an integer from 1 to 7 inclusively; and
      • b represents an integer from 1 to 4 inclusively.
        Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00041
      • wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • L represents O, NR, or S;
      • R represents H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl;
      • R′ represents H, halogen, NO2, SR, SO3, OR, NR2, alkyl, aryl, or carboxy;
      • a represents an integer from 1 to 7 inclusively; and
      • b represents an integer from 1 to 4 inclusively.
        Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00042
      • wherein, independently for each occurrence,
      • L represents O, NR, or S;
      • R represents H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl;
      • R′ represents H, halogen, NO2, SR, SO3, OR, NR2, alkyl, aryl, or carboxy;
      • a represents an integer from 1 to 7 inclusively; and
      • b represents an integer from 1 to 4 inclusively.
  • Also included are pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts and complexes of the sirtuin inhibitory compounds of formulas 19-21 described herein. In cases wherein the compounds may have one or more chiral centers, unless specified, the compounds contemplated herein may be a single stereoisomer or racemic mixtures of stereoisomers.
  • In cases in which the sirtuin inhibitory compounds have unsaturated carbon-carbon double bonds, both the c is (Z) and trans (E) isomers are contemplated herein. In cases wherein the compounds may exist in tautomeric forms, such as keto-enol tautomers, such as
    Figure US20050171027A1-20050804-C00043
    each tautomeric form is contemplated as being included within the methods presented herein, whether existing in equilibrium or locked in one form by appropriate substitution with R′. The meaning of any substituent at any one occurrence is independent of its meaning, or any other substituent's meaning, at any other occurrence.
  • Also included in the methods presented herein are prodrugs of the sirtuin inhibitory compounds of formulas 19-21. Prodrugs are considered to be any covalently bonded carriers that release the active parent drug in vivo.
  • Whether in vitro or in vivo, a sirtuin inhibitory compound may also be contacted with a cell or administered either alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents. In one embodiment, more than one sirtuin inhibitory compound may be contacted with a cell or administered. For example, at least 2, 3, 5, or 10 different sirtuin inhibitory compounds may be contacted with a cell or administered. In another embodiment, a sirtuin inhibitory compound may be administered as part of a combination therapy with another therapeutic agent. Such combination therapies may be administered simultaneously (e.g., more than one therapeutic agent administered at the same time) or sequentially with e.g., different compounds or therapeutic agents administered at different times during a treatment regimen.
  • To promote weight gain, one or more sirtuin inhibitory compounds of formulas 19-21 may be used in combination with the following “weight gain promoting agents”: beta blockers (such as propranolo), alpha blockers (such as clonidine, prazosin and terazosin); insulin, sulfonylureas (such as glipizide and glyburide), thiazolidinediones (such as pioglitazone and rosiglitazone), meglitinides, nateglinide, repaglinide, lithium carbonate, valproic acid, carbamazepine, antidepressants, including, for example, tricyclics (such as amitriptyline and imipramine), monoamine-oxidase inhibitors, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), bupropion, paroxetine and mirtazapine, chlorpromazine, thiothixene, steroids (such as prednisone), oral contraceptives (birth control pills) or other contraceptives containing estrogen and/or progesterone (Depo-Provera, Norplant, Ortho), testosterone or Megestrol.
  • In another embodiment, one or more sirtuin inhibitory compounds may be directed specifically to a certain tissue (e.g., liver) rather than the whole body. Tissue specific treatments may be used to treat, e.g., hyperglycemia.
  • Methods for stimulating fat accumulation in a cell may also comprise decreasing the protein level of a sirtuin in the cell. Decreasing a protein level can be achieved according to methods known in the art. For example, an siRNA, an antisense or ribozyme targeted to the sirtuin can be expressed in the cell. A dominant negative sirtuin mutant, e.g., a mutant that is not capable of deacetylating, may be used. For example, mutant H363Y of SIRT1, described, e.g., in Luo et al. (2001) Cell 107: 137 can be used. Alternatively, agents that inhibit transcription can be used.
  • In other embodiments, a compound described herein, e.g., a sirtuin activator or inhibitor, does not have significant or detectable anti-oxidant activities, as determined by any of the standard assays known in the art. For example, a compound does not significantly scavenge free-radicals, such as O2 radicals. A compound may have less than about 2, 3, 5, 10, 30 or 100 fold anti-oxidant activity relative to another compound, e.g., resveratrol.
  • A compound may also have a binding affinity for a sirtuin of about 10−9M, 10−10M, 10−11M, 10−12M or less. A compound may reduce the Km of a sirtuin for its substrate or NAD+ by a factor of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 or 100. A compound may increase the Vmax of a sirtuin by a factor of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 or 100. Exemplary compounds that may increase the Vmax of a sirtuin include, for example, analogs of isonicotinamide, such as, for example, compounds of formulas 11-14, and/or analogs of O-acetyl-ADP-ribose, such as, for example, compounds of formulas 15-18. A compound may have an EC50 for activating the deacetylase activity of a sirtuin of less than about 1 nM, less than about 10 nM, less than about 100 nM, less than about 1 μM, less than about 10 μM, less than about 100 μM, or from about 1-10 nM, from about 10-100 nM, from about 0.1-1 μM, from about 1-10 μM or from about 10-100 μM. A compound may activate the deacetylase activity of a sirtuin by a factor of at least about 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, or 100, as measured in an acellular assay or in a cell based assay as described in the Examples. A compound may cause at least a 10%, 30%, 50%, 80%, 2 fold, 5 fold, 10 fold, 50 fold or 100 fold greater induction of the deacetylase activity of SIRT1 relative to the same concentration of resveratrol or other compound described herein. A compound may also have an EC50 for activating SIRT5 that is at least about 10 fold, 20 fold, 30 fold, 50 fold greater than that for activating SIRT1.
  • In an exemplary embodiment, the methods and compositions described herein may include a combination therapy comprising (i) at least one sirtuin-activating compound that reduce the Km of a sirtuin for its substrate or NAD+ by a factor of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 or 100, and (ii) at least one sirtuin-activating compound that increases the Vmax of a sirtuin by a factor of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 or 100. In one embodiment, a combination therapy may comprise (i) at least one sirtuin-activating compound of formula 1-10, and (ii) at least one sirtuin-activating compound of formula 11-18.
  • A compound may traverse the cytoplasmic membrane of a cell. For example, a compound may have a cell-permeability of at least about 20%, 50%, 75%, 80%, 90% or 95%.
  • Compounds described herein may also have one or more of the following characteristics: the compound may be essentially non-toxic to a cell or subject; the compound may be an organic molecule or a small molecule of 2000 amu or less, 1000 amu or less; a compound may have a half-life under normal atmospheric conditions of at least about 30 days, 60 days, 120 days, 6 months or I year; the compound may have a half-life in solution of at least about 30 days, 60 days, 120 days, 6 months or 1 year; a compound may be more stable in solution than resveratrol by at least a factor of about 50%, 2 fold, 5 fold, 10 fold, 30 fold, 50 fold or 100 fold; a compound may promote deacetylation of the DNA repair factor Ku70; a compound may promote deacetylation of RelA/p65; a compound may increase general turnover rates and enhance the sensitivity of cells to TNF-induced apoptosis.
  • The effect of a compound on the activity of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1, may be determined as described, e.g., in Howitz et al., supra or as follows. For instance, sirtuin proteins may be contacted with a compound in vitro, e.g., in a solution or in a cell. In one embodiment, a sirtuin protein is contacted with a compound in a solution and an activity of the sirtuin, e.g., its ability to deacetylate a protein, such as a histone or, p53, or portions thereof, is determined. Generally, a sirtuin is activated or inhibited by a compound when at least one of its biological activities, e.g., deacetylation, activity, is higher or lower, respectively, in the presence of the compound than in its absence. Activation or inhibition may be by a factor of at least about 10%, 30%, 50%, 100% (i.e., a factor of two), 3, 10, 30, or 100.
  • Whether a sirtuin is activated or inhibited can be determined, e.g., by contacting the sirtuin or a cell or cell extract containing the sirtuin with a deacetylation target, such as a histone or, p53 protein, or portions thereof, and determining the level of acetylation of the deacetylation target. A higher level of acetylation of the target incubated with the sirtuin that is being tested relative to the level of acetylation of a control sirtuin indicates that the sirtuin that is being tested is activated. Conversely, a lower level of acetylation of the target incubated with the sirtuin that is being tested relative to the level of acetylation of a control sirtuin indicates that the sirtuin that is being tested is inhibited. The control sirtuin may be a recombinantly produced sirtuin that has not been contacted with a sirtuin-activating or -inhibiting compound.
  • Additional Exemplary Methods
  • Described herein are methods for treating or preventing obesity or generally weight gain, in a subject, such as to reduce the weight of the subject or reduce weight gain. A method may comprise administering to a subject, such as a subject in need thereof, a pharmaceutically effective amount of an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 or Sir2. A subject in need of such a treatment may be a subject who is obese, or likely to become obese, or who has, or is, likely to gain excess weight, as predicted, e.g., from family history. Exemplary agents are those described herein. A combination of agents may also be administered. A method may further comprise monitoring the weight of the subject and/or the level of activation of sirtuins, for example, in adipose tissue.
  • Also described herein are methods for treating or preventing a metabolic disorder, such as insulin-resistance or other precursor symptom of type II diabetes, type II diabetes or complications thereof. Methods may increase insulin sensitivity or decrease insulin levels in a subject. A method may comprise administering to a subject, such as a subject in need thereof, a pharmaceutically effective amount of an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 or Sir2. A subject in need of such a treatment may be a subject who has insulin resistance or other precusor symptom of type II diabetes, who has type II diabetes, or who is likely to develop any of these conditions. For example, the subject may be a subject having insulin resistance, e.g., having high circulating levels of insulin and/or associated conditions, such as hyperlipidemia, dyslipogenesis, hypercholesterolemia, impaired glucose tolerance, high blood glucose sugar level, other manifestations of syndrome X, hypertension, atherosclerosis and lipodystrophy. Exemplary agents are those described herein.
  • A combination of agents may also be administered. A method may further comprise monitoring in the subject the state of any of these conditions and/or the level of activation of sirtuins, for example, in adipose tissue.
  • Other methods include administering to a subject of a combination of an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin and an agent that increases the activity or protein level of an AMPK, e.g., other than an agent that activates a sirtuin. Activators of AMPK include AICAR or Metformin. Alternatively, the protein level of AMPK may be increased by introducing into the cell a nucleic acid encoding AMPK. The nucleotide sequence of the catalytic domain (α1) of human AMPK has the nucleotide sequence set forth in GenBank Accession No. NM—206907 and encodes a protein having the amino acid sequence set forth in GenBank Accession No. NP—996790. The nucleotide sequence of the non-catalytic domain (β1) of human AMPK has the nucleotide sequence set forth in GenBank Accession No. NM—006253 and encodes a protein having the amino acid sequence set forth in GenBank Accession No. NP—006244. The nucleotide sequence of the non-catalytic domain (γ1) of human AMPK has the nucleotide sequence set forth in GenBank Accession No. NM—212461 and encodes a protein having the amino acid sequence sets forth in GenBank Accession No. NP—997626. To increase the protein level of human AMPK in a cell, it may be necessary to introduce nucleic acids encoding each of the subunits of the protein. Nucleic acid sequences encoding the different subunits may be contained on the same or separate nucleic acid molecules.
  • Other diseases that may be treated by administering an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin and/or AMPK include certain renal diseases including glomerulonephritis, glomerulosclerosis, nephrotic syndrome, hypertensive nephrosclerosis. These compounds may also be useful for improving cognitive functions in dementia, treating diabetic complications, psoriasis, polycystic ovarian syndrome (PCOS) and prevention and treatment of bone loss, e.g. osteoporosis.
  • Additional diseases and conditions that will benefit from weight loss and can be treated as described herein include: high blood pressure, hypertension, high blood cholesterol, dyslipidemia, type 2 diabetes, insulin resistance, glucose intolerance, hyperinsulinemia, coronary heart disease, angina pectoris, congestive heart failure, stroke, gallstones, cholescystitis and cholelithiasis, gout, osteoarthritis, obstructive sleep apnea and respiratory problems, some types of cancer (such as endometrial, breast, prostate, and colon), complications of pregnancy, poor female reproductive health (such as menstrual irregularities, infertility, irregular ovulation), bladder control problems (such as stress incontinence); uric acid nephrolithiasis; psychological disorders (such as depression, eating disorders, distorted body image, and low self esteem). Stunkard A J, Wadden T A. (Editors) Obesity: theory and therapy, Second Edition. New York: Raven Press, 1993. Finally, patients with AIDS can develop lipodystrophy or insulin resistance in response to combination therapies for AIDS. Accordingly, any of these conditions can be treated or prevented by the methods described herein for reducing or preventing weight gain.
  • Also provided herein are methods for stimulating weight gain. A method may comprise administering to a subject, such as a subject in need thereof, a pharmaceutically effective amount of an agent that decreases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1 or Sir2. A subject in need of such a treatment may be a subject who has cachexia or likely to develop cachexia. Exemplary agents are those described herein. A combination of agents may also be administered. A method may further comprise monitoring in the subject the state of the disease or of activation of sirtuins, for example, in adipose tissue.
  • Methods for stimulating fat accumulation in cells may be used in vitro, to establish cell models of weight gain, which may be used, e.g., for identifying other drugs that prevent weight gain.
  • A method for stimulating weight gain or fat accumulation in a cell or subject may further comprise decreasing the activity or protein level of an AMPK. This can be achieved, e.g., by inhibiting the expression, transcription, translation or posttanslational modification of at least one of the three subunits of AMPK, such as the catalytic subunit. Techniques known in the art, such as RNAi, antisense and ribozyme can be used. In addition, dominant negative mutants may be expressed in the cell. Dominant negative mutants, such as having a mutated AMPK alpha subunit are described, e.g., in Minokoshi et al. (2004) Nature 428: 569; Xing et al. (2003) J. Biol. Chem. 278: 28372 and Woods et al. (2000) Mol. Cell Biol. 20: 6704. Compounds that inhibit AMPK expression or activity may also be used. An exemplary compound is described in Zhou et al. (2001) J. Clin. Invest. 108: 1167.
  • Also provided herein are methods for modulating adipogenesis or fat cell differentiation, whether in vitro or in vivo. In particular, high circulating levels of insulin and/or insulin like growth factor (IGF) 1 will be prevented from recruiting preadipocytes to differentiate into adipocytes. Such methods may be used to modulate obesity. A method for inhibiting adipogenesis may comprise contacting a cell with an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin, such as a sirtuin activating compound, e.g., a compound described herein. A method for stimulating adipogenesis may comprise contacting a cell with an agent that decreases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin, such as a sirtuin inhibiting compound, e.g., a compound described herein.
  • Based at least on the fact that resveratrol has been shown herein to activate AMPK, resveratrol and other sirtuin activating compounds may be used for treating or preventing conditions that can benefit from AMPK modulation, e.g., which are associated with and/or regulated by AMPK, in addition to those described above. Exemplary conditions include clinical symptoms associated with hypoxia or ischemia (myocardial infarction, stroke), and disorders of nutrition (see U.S. Pat. No. 6,124,125).
  • Similarly, any compound that activates AMPK may be used for the same purposes as sirtuin activating compounds may be used, e.g., to extend lifespan, to make cells more resistant to stress and to protect cells against apoptosis.
  • Other methods provided herein are methods for reducing appetite, or increasing satiety, thereby causing weight loss or avoidance of weight gain. Methods may include administrating to a subject, e.g., a subject in need thereof, an amount of a sirtuin activator or an agent that increases the protein level of a sirtuin in the subject. A subject in need of such a treatment may be a subject who is overweight, obese or a subject likely to become overweight or obese. The method may comprise administering daily, every other day, or once a week, a dose, e.g., in the form of a pill, to a subject. The dose may be an “appetite reducing dose.” Such a dose may be, e.g., one pill of Longevinex™ daily.
  • Assays for determining the likelihood that a subject has or will develop weight gain, obesity, insulin resistance, diabetes or precursor symptoms or conditions resulting therefrom, are also provided. Such assays may comprise determining the level activity or expression (e.g., mRNA, pre-mRNA or protein) of a sirtuin, such as SIRT1, or AMPK in a subject. A low level of sirtuin activity or expression in a subject is likely to indicate that the subject has or is likely to develop weight gain, obesity, insulin resistance, diabetes, precursor symptoms thereof or secondary conditions thereof. Alternatively, a higher level of sirtuin activity or expression in a subject is likely to indicate that the subject has or is likely to develop weight loss and be protected from developing high weight associated diseases, such as insulin resistance and diabetes. Other assays include determining the activity or level of expression of a sirtuin and AMPK.
  • Also provided herein are methods for identifying compounds that modulate weight gain and/or treat or prevent insulin resistance (or sensitivity) or diabetes. A method may comprise identifying an agent that modulates the activity or protein level of a sirtuin and testing whether the test agent modulates weight gain and/or can be used for treating or preventing insulin resistance or diabetes. The first step of the method may comprise contacting a sirtuin with a test agent and determining the effect of the test agent on the activity of the sirtuin, e.g., SIRT1, as described, e.g., in Howitz et al., supra. The first step of the method may also comprise contacting a cell comprising a sirtuin with a test agent and determining the effect of the test agent on the activity of or expression level of the sirtuin. Expression levels of a sirtuin may be determined by measuring the mRNA, pre-mRNA or protein level of the sirtuin. The second step of the method may comprise testing the agent in an animal model for obesity, insulin resistance and/or diabetes. Such animal models are well known in the art. Screening methods may further comprise a step to determine the toxicity or adverse effects of the agents.
  • Other screening assays comprise identifying agents that modulate AMPK activity or protein levels. There is a need for compounds that activate AMPK but do not have the toxicities or adverse effects of known AMPK activators, such as metformin/phenformin.
  • Pharmaceutical Formulations and Administration Modes
  • Pharmaceutical compositions for use in accordance with the present methods may be formulated in conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers or excipients. Thus, sirtuin-activating or -inhibiting compounds and their physiologically acceptable salts and solvates may be formulated for administration by, for example, injection, inhalation or insufflation (either through the mouth or the nose) or oral, buccal, parenteral or rectal administration. In one embodiment, the compound is administered locally, at the site where the target cells, e.g., fat cells, are present, i.e., in the adipose tissue.
  • Compounds can be formulated for a variety of loads of administration, including systemic and topical or localized administration. Techniques and formulations generally may be found in Remmington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Meade Publishing Co., Easton, Pa. For systemic administration, injection is preferred, including intramuscular, intravenous, intraperitoneal, and subcutaneous. For injection, the compounds can be formulated in liquid solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hank's solution or Ringer's solution. In addition, the compounds may be formulated in solid form and redissolved or suspended immediately prior to use. Lyophilized forms are also included.
  • For oral administration, the pharmaceutical compositions may take the form of, for example, tablets, lozanges, or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose); fillers (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc or silica); disintegrants (e.g., potato starch or sodium starch glycolate); or wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulphate). The tablets may be coated by methods well known in the art. Liquid preparations for oral administration may take the form of, for example, solutions, syrups or suspensions, or they may be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use. Such liquid preparations may be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., ationd oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol or fractionated vegetable oils); and preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl-p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid). The preparations may also contain buffer salts, flavoring, coloring and sweetening agents as appropriate. Preparations for oral administration may be suitably formulated to give controlled release of the active compound.
  • Polyphenols such as resveratrol can oxidize and lose sirtuin-stimulatory activity, especially in a liquid or semi-solid form. To prevent oxidation and preserve the sirtuin-stimulatory activity of polyphenol-containing compounds, the compounds may be stored in a nitrogen atmosphere or sealed in a type of capsule and/or foil package that excludes oxygen (e.g. Capsugel™).
  • For administration by inhalation, the compounds may be conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas. In the case of a pressurized aerosol the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount. Capsules and cartridges of e.g., gelatin, for use in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
  • The compounds may be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, e.g., by bolus injection or continuous infusion. Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative. The compositions may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents. Alternatively, the active ingredient may be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
  • The compounds may also be formulated in rectal compositions such as suppositories or retention enemas, e.g., containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides.
  • In addition to the formulations described previously, the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection. Thus, for example, the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt. Controlled release formula also include patches.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions (including cosmetic preparations) may comprise from about 0.00001 to 100% such as from 0.001 to 10% or from 0.1% to 5% by weight of one or more compounds described herein.
  • In one embodiment, a compound described herein, is incorporated into a topical formulation containing a topical carrier that is generally suited to topical drug administration and comprising any such material known in the art. The topical carrier may be selected so as to provide the composition in the desired form, e.g., as an ointment, lotion, cream, microemulsion, gel, oil, solution, or the like, and may be comprised of a material of either naturally occurring or synthetic origin. It is preferable that the selected carrier not adversely affect the active agent or other components of the topical formulation. Examples of suitable topical carriers for use herein include water, alcohols and other nontoxic organic solvents, glycerin, mineral oil, silicone, petroleum jelly, lanolin, fatty acids, vegetable oils, parabens, waxes, and the like.
  • Formulations may be colorless, odorless ointments, lotions, creams, microemulsions and gels.
  • Compounds may be incorporated into ointments, which generally are semisolid preparations which are typically based on petrolatum or other petroleum derivatives. The specific ointment base to be used, as will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, is one that will provide for optimum drug delivery, and, preferably, will provide for other desired characteristics as well, e.g., emolliency or the like. As with other carriers or vehicles, an ointment base should be inert, stable, nonirritating and nonsensitizing. As explained in Remington's, cited in the preceding section, ointment bases may be grouped in four classes: oleaginous bases; emulsifiable bases; emulsion bases; and water-soluble bases. Oleaginous ointment bases include, for example, vegetable oils, fats obtained from animals, and semisolid hydrocarbons obtained from petroleum. Emulsifiable ointment bases, also known as absorbent ointment bases, contain little or no water and include, for example, hydroxystearin sulfate, anhydrous lanolin and hydrophilic petrolatum. Emulsion ointment bases are either water-in-oil (W/O) emulsions or oil-in-water (O/W) emulsions, and include, for example, cetyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate, lanolin and stearic acid. Exemplary water-soluble ointment bases are prepared from polyethylene glycols (PEGs) of varying molecular weight; again, reference may be had to Remington's, supra, for further information.
  • Compounds may be incorporated into lotions, which generally are preparations to be applied to the skin surface without friction, and are typically liquid or semiliquid preparations in which solid particles, including the active agent, are present in a water or alcohol base. Lotions are usually suspensions of solids, and may comprise a liquid oily emulsion of the oil-in-water type. Lotions are preferred formulations for treating large body areas, because of the ease of applying a more fluid composition. It is generally necessary that the insoluble matter in a lotion be finely divided. Lotions will typically contain and holding the active agent in contact with the skin, e.g., methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, or the like. An exemplary lotion formulation for use in conjunction with the present method contains propylene glycol mixed with a hydrophilic petrolatum such as that which may be obtained under the trademark AquaphorR™ from Beiersdorf, Inc. (Norwalk, Conn.).
  • Compounds may be incorporated into creams, which generally are viscous liquid or semisolid emulsions, either oil-in-water or water-in-oil. Cream bases are water-washable, and contain an oil phase, an emulsifier and an aqueous phase. The oil phase is generally comprised of petrolatum and a fatty alcohol such as cetyl or stearyl alcohol; the aqueous phase usually, although not necessarily, exceeds the oil phase in volume, and generally contains a humectant. The emulsifier in a cream formulation, as explained in Remington's, supra, is generally a nonionic, anionic, cationic or amphoteric surfactant.
  • Compounds may be incorporated into microemulsions, which generally are thermodynamically stable, isotropically clear dispersions of two immiscible liquids, such as oil and water, stabilized by an interfacial film of surfactant molecules (Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology (New York: Marcel Dekker, 1992), volume 9). For the preparation of microemulsions, surfactant (emulsifier), co-surfactant (co-emulsifier), an oil phase and a water phase are necessary. Suitable surfactants include any surfactants that are useful in the preparation of emulsions, e.g., emulsifiers that are typically used in the preparation of creams. The co-surfactant (or “co-emulsifer”) is generally selected from the group of polyglycerol derivatives, glycerol derivatives and fatty alcohols. Preferred emulsifier/co-emulsifier combinations are generally although not necessarily selected from the group consisting of: glyceryl monostearate and polyoxyethylene stearate; polyethylene glycol and ethylene glycol palmitostearate; and caprilic and capric triglycerides and oleoyl macrogolglycerides. The water phase includes not only water but also, typically, buffers, glucose, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycols, preferably lower molecular weight polyethylene glycols (e.g., PEG 300 and PEG 400), and/or glycerol, and the like, while the oil phase will generally comprise, for example, fatty acid esters, modified vegetable oils, silicone oils, mixtures of mono- di- and triglycerides, mono- and di-esters of PEG (e.g., oleoyl macrogol glycerides), etc.
  • Compounds may be incorporated into gel formulations, which generally are semisolid systems consisting of either suspensions made up of small inorganic particles (two-phase systems) or large organic molecules distributed substantially uniformly throughout a carrier liquid (single phase gels). Single phase gels can be made, for example, by combining the active agent, a carrier liquid and a suitable gelling agent such as tragacanth (at 2 to 5%), sodium alginate (at 2-10%), gelatin (at 2-15%), methylcellulose (at 3-5%), sodium carboxymethylcellulose (at 2-5%), carbomer (at 0.3-5%) or polyvinyl alcohol (at 10-20%) together and mixing until a characteristic semisolid product is produced. Other suitable gelling agents include methylhydroxycellulose, polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene, hydroxyethylcellulose and gelatin. Although gels commonly employ aqueous carrier liquid, alcohols and oils can be used as the carrier liquid as well.
  • Various additives, known to those skilled in the art, may be included in formulations, e.g., topical formulations. Examples of additives include, but are not limited to, solubilizers, skin permeation enhancers, opacifiers, preservatives (e.g., anti-oxidants), gelling agents, buffering agents, surfactants (particularly nonionic and amphoteric surfactants), emulsifiers, emollients, thickening a gents, stabilizers, humectants, colorants, fragrance, and the like. Inclusion of solubilizers and/or skin permeation enhancers is particularly preferred, along with emulsifiers, emollients and preservatives. An optimum topical formulation comprises approximately: 2 wt. % to 60 wt. %, preferably 2 wt. % to 50 wt. %, solubilizer and/or skin permeation enhancer; 2 wt. % to 50 wt. %, preferably 2 wt. % to 20 wt. %, emulsifiers; 2 wt. % to 20 wt. % emollient; and 0.01 to 0.2 wt. % preservative, with the active agent and carrier (e.g., water) making of the remainder of the formulation.
  • A skin permeation enhancer serves to facilitate passage of therapeutic levels of active agent to pass through a reasonably sized area of unbroken skin. Suitable enhancers are well known in the art and include, for example: lower alkanols such as methanol ethanol and 2-propanol; alkyl methyl sulfoxides such as dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), decylmethylsulfoxide (C10 MSO) and tetradecylmethyl sulfoxide; pyrrolidones such as 2-pyrrolidone, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-(-hydroxyethyl)pyrrolidone; urea; N,N-diethyl-m-toluamide; C2-C6 alkanediols; miscellaneous solvents such as dimethyl formamide (DMF), N,N-dimethylacetamide (DMA) and tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol; and the 1-substituted azacycloheptan-2-ones, particularly 1-n-dodecylcyclazacycloheptan-2-one (laurocapram; available under the trademark AzoneR™ from Whitby Research Incorporated, Richmond, Va.).
  • Examples of solubilizers include, but are not limited to, the following: hydrophilic ethers such as diethylene glycol monoethyl ether (ethoxydiglycol, available commercially as TranscutolR™) and diethylene glycol monoethyl ether oleate (available commercially as SoftcutolR™); polyethylene castor oil derivatives such as polyoxy 35 castor oil, polyoxy 40 hydrogenated castor oil, etc.; polyethylene glycol, particularly lower molecular weight polyethylene glycols such as PEG 300 and PEG 400, and polyethylene glycol derivatives such as PEG-8 caprylic/capric glycerides (available commercially as LabrasolR™); alkyl methyl sulfoxides such as DMSO; pyrrolidones such as 2-pyrrolidone and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone; and DMA. Many solubilizers can also act as absorption enhancers. A single solubilizer may be incorporated into the formulation, or a mixture of solubilizers may be incorporated therein.
  • Suitable emulsifiers and co-emulsifiers include, without limitation, those emulsifiers and co-emulsifiers described with respect to microemulsion formulations. Emollients include, for example, propylene glycol, glycerol, isopropyl myristate, polypropylene glycol-2 (PPG-2) myristyl ether propionate, and the like.
  • Other active agents may also be included in formulations, e.g., anti-inflammatory agents, analgesics, antimicrobial agents, antifungal agents, antibiotics, vitamins, antioxidants, and sunblock agents commonly found in sunscreen formulations including, but not limited to, anthranilates, benzophenones (particularly benzophenone-3), camphor derivatives, cinnamates (e.g., octyl methoxycinnamate), dibenzoyl methanes (e.g., butyl methoxydibenzoyl methane), p-aminobenzoic acid (PABA) and derivatives thereof, and salicylates (e.g., octyl salicylate).
  • In certain topical formulations, the active agent is present in an amount in the range of approximately 0.25 wt. % to 75 wt. % of the formulation, preferably in the range of approximately 0.25 wt. % to 30 wt. % of the formulation, more preferably in the range of approximately 0.5 wt. % to 15 wt. % of the formulation, and most preferably in the range of approximately 1.0 wt. % to 10 wt. % of the formulation.
  • Topical skin treatment compositions can be packaged in a suitable container to suit its viscosity and intended use by the consumer. For example, a lotion or cream can be packaged in a bottle or a roll-ball applicator, or a propellant-driven aerosol device or a container fitted with a pump suitable for finger operation. When the composition is a cream, it can simply be stored in a non-deformable bottle or squeeze container, such as a tube or a lidded jar. The composition may also be included in capsules such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,063,507. Accordingly, also provided are closed containers containing a cosmetically acceptable composition as herein defined.
  • In an alternative embodiment, a pharmaceutical formulation is provided for oral or parenteral administration, in which case the formulation may comprise an activating compound-containing microemulsion as described above, and may contain alternative pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, vehicles, additives, etc. particularly suited to oral or parenteral drug administration. Alternatively, an activating compound-containing microemulsion may be administered orally or parenterally substantially as described above, without modification.
  • Administration of a sirtuin activator or inhibitor may be followed by measuring a factor in the subject, such as measuring the activity of the sirtuin. In an illustrative embodiment, a cell is obtained from a subject following administration of an activating or inhibiting compound to the subject, such as by obtaining a biopsy, and the activity of the sirtuin or sirtuin expression level is determined in the biopsy. Alternatively, biomarkers, such as plasma biomarkers may be followed. Biomarkers may be adipose cell derived secretory proteins, such as leptin, adiponectin, and resistin. The cell may be any cell of the subject, but in cases in which an activating compound is administered locally, the cell is preferably a cell that is located in the vicinity of the site of administration. The cell may be an adipocyte.
  • Other factors that may be monitored include weight, body mass, blood glucose sugar levels, blood lipid levels and any other factor that may be measured for monitoring diseases or conditions described herein.
  • Introduction and expression of a nucleic acid encoding a sirtuin, an AMPK or molecules that will reduced the protein level of a sirtuin or AMPK in a cell, e.g., an siRNA, may be accomplished using an expression vector. Exemplary expression vectors include adenoviral vectors or adenoviral-associated viruses (AAV). These vectors, as well as others and methods for infecting target cells are well known in the art. Alternatively, nucleic acids may also be introduced into cells using liposomes or similar technologies.
  • Kits
  • Also provided herein are kits, e.g., kits for therapeutic purposes, including kits for modulating fat accumulation. A kit may comprise one or more agent that modulates sirtuin or AMPK protein activity or level, e.g., sirtuin activating or inhibitory compounds, such as those described herein, and optionally devices for contacting cells with the agents. Devices include syringes, stents and other devices for introducing a compound into a subject or applying it to the skin of a subject.
  • Further, a kit may also contain components for measuring a factor, e.g., described above, such as the activity of sirtuin proteins, e.g., in tissue samples.
  • Other kits include kits for diagnosing the likelihood of having or developing weight gain, obesity, insulin-resistance, diabetes, precursors thereof or secondary conditions thereof. A kit may comprise an agent for measuring the activity and or expression level of a sirtuin or AMPK.
  • Kits for screening assays are also provided. Exemplary kits comprise one or more agents for conducting a screening assay, such as a sirtuin, an AMPK or a biologically active portion thereof, or a cell or cell extract comprising such. Any of the kits may also comprise instructions for use.
  • The present description is further illustrated by the following examples, which should not be construed as limiting in any way. The contents of all cited references (including literature references, issued patents, published patent applications and GenBank Accession numbers as cited throughout this application) are hereby expressly incorporated by reference.
  • The practice of the present methods will employ, unless otherwise indicated, conventional techniques of cell biology, cell culture, molecular biology, transgenic biology, microbiology, recombinant DNA, and immunology, which are within the skill of the art. Such techniques are explained fully in the literature. See, for example, Molecular Cloning A Laboratory Manual, 2nd Ed., ed. by Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press: 1989); DNA Cloning, Volumes I and II (D. N. Glover ed., 1985); Oligonucleotide Synthesis (M. J. Gait ed., 1984); Mullis et al. U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,195; Nucleic Acid Hybridization (B. D. Hames & S. J. Higgins eds. 1984); Transcription And Translation (B. D. Hames & S. J. Higgins eds. 1984); Culture Of Animal Cells (R. I. Freshney, Alan R. Liss, Inc., 1987); Immobilized Cells And Enzymes (IRL Press, 1986); B. Perbal, A Practical Guide To Molecular Cloning (1984); the treatise, Methods In Enzymology (Academic Press, Inc., N.Y.); Gene Transfer Vectors For Mammalian Cells (J. H. Miller and M. P. Calos eds., 1987, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory); Methods In Enzymology, Vols. 154 and 155 (Wu et al. eds.), Immunochemical Methods In Cell And Molecular Biology (Mayer and Walker, eds., Academic Press, London, 1987); Handbook Of Experimental Immunology, Volumes I-IV (D. M. Weir and C. C. Blackwell, eds., 1986); Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1986).
    • EXAMPLES Example 1 Resveratrol Promotes Fat Mobilization
  • This example shows that a compound that activates sirtuins, resveratrol, stimulates fat metabolism by reducing fat accumulation in C. elegans.
  • Wild-type N2 C. elegans worms were grown on OP50 bacteria and exposed overnight to vehicle (0.1% ethanol) alone or with 10, 50 or 100 μM of resveratrol (in ethanol). Fat accumulation was visualized with Nile Red staining, as described further below and in Ashrafi K, et al. Nature 421: 268-27 (2003).
  • The results, which are shown in FIG. 1, indicate that resveratrol treatment with 100 μM resulted in a 90% reduction of fat accumulation. Similarly, incubation of the worms in the presence of 10 μM or 50 μM of resveratrol showed a marked decrease in fat accumulation. The decrease in fat accumulation is as or more striking than treatments with AICAR, a know activator of AMPK and fatty acid oxidation.
  • Sir2.1, which is activated by resveratrol, acts via the transcription factor DAF-16 to prolong lifespan in yeast (Tissenbaum and Guarente (2001) Nature 410: 227). Similarly to the wild-type C. elegans, in DAF-16 mutant worms (mgDf47), which are defective in insulin-signaling (Wolkow, et al. Science 290: 147, 2000), resveratrol stimulates fat mobilization and a decrease in fat accumulation (FIG. 2). This indicates that resveratrol signaling to fat metabolism in adult worms occurs via a pathway that is independent of DAF-16.
  • Accordingly, compounds in the resveratrol class that stimulate sirtuin proteins can promote fat mobilization in both wild-type and mutant C. elegans.
    • Example 2 Nicotinamide Promotes Fat Accumulation
  • If stimulators of sirtuin proteins decrease fat accumulation, inhibitors of sirtuin proteins, such as nicotinamide, should increase fat accumulation.
  • C. elegans worms were incubated overnight in the presence of 0, 1 or 10 mM nicotinamide, and stained with Nile-Red as described above. The results, which are shown in FIG. 3, indicate that the worms displayed a nicotinamide-concentration dependent increase in fat accumulation.
    • Example 3 Sir2 is Necessary for Resveratrol Mediated Fat Mobilization
  • The role of Sir2.1 in fat metabolism was shown in C. elegans worms in which Sir2.1 was RNA inactivated. Young adult worms were grown to adulthood in the presence of bacteria that carry RNAi vector alone or vector encoding Sir2.1 RNAi (R11A8.4), as described below. These worms were grown in the presence or absence of resveratrol, and stained with Nile-Red as described below. The results, which are shown in FIG. 4, indicate that the worms cultured in the presence of bacteria that carry Sir2.1 RNAi did not show resveratrol induced fat mobilization. These results further confirm that Sir2 is necessary for mediating the fat mobilization effect of resveratrol.
    • Example 4 AMPK is Necessary for Resveratrol Mediated Fat Mobilization
  • It was shown above that Sir2 is necessary for mediating the effect of resveratrol on fat mobilization. It is shown in this Example that AMPK is also necessary for mediating this effect. AMPK regulates diverse aspects of cell metabolism, glucose uptake and fatty acid oxidation. Many therapeutic agents and hormones that improve insulin sensitivity, e.g., 5-aminoimidazole-4-carboxamide-1-beta-D-ribofuranoside (AICAR) and Metformin, (decrease circulating insulin levels) are known to activate AMPK signaling to glucose uptake and fatty acid oxidation. In mammals, AMPK regulates fat metabolism by stimulating fatty acid oxidation via a series of complex steps that involve phosphorylation/inactivation of acetyl coA carboxylase, release of carnitine-palmitoyl transferase-1 (CPT-1) and carnitine octanoyl transferase (COT) from end product inhibition by malonyl coA, and transport of fatty acids into the mitochondria to be oxidized.
  • We have examined the C. elegans database and found two gene products that are highly related to mammalian AMPK, TOC1.8 and Par2.3; five genes encoding homologs of CPT-1 and one gene encoding a homolog of COT. C. elegans worms were incubated with bacteria carrying RNAi vector alone, or interfering RNA against TOC1.8 or F41E7.3, a C. elegans homologue of COT in the presence or absence of AICAR. Fat accumulation was visualized with Nile-Red, as described below. The results indicate that RNA inactivation of TOC1.8 or COT inhibits AICAR-stimulated fat mobilization. Thus, AICAR/AMPK signaling to fatty acid oxidation is conserved in worms and mammalian cells.
  • The effect of TOC1.8 and COT inactivation was then investigated in C. elegans incubated with resveratrol. C. elegans worms were incubated with bacteria carrying RNAi vector alone, or a vector encoding TOC1.8 or COT interfering RNA in the presence or absence of resveratrol. Fat accumulation was visualized with Nile-Red, as described below.
  • The results are shown in FIG. 5. In the presence of the RNAi vector alone, resveratrol reduces fat content in normal worms by 75% (FIG. 5, panel a). However, RNA inactivation of TOC1.8, a homolog of mammalian AMPK or F41E7.3, a homolog of mammalian COT, blocks resveratrol-stimulated fat mobilization (see panels b and c of FIG. 5). Thus, AMPK is necessary for resveratrol-induced fat mobilization. Thus, we conclude that resveratrol, analogous to the direct AMPK activator AICAR, stimulates the AMPK signaling cascade to fat metabolism in worms. In contrast, RNA inactivation of DAF-16, the transcription factor downstream of insulin signaling to longevity, or inactivation of DAF-16 by mutation, had no effect on resveratrol-stimulated fat mobilization (see panel d of FIG. 5).
  • Thus, inhibition of the resveratrol effect by RNA inactivation of AMPK and COT suggests that mobilization of fat requires activation of the AMPK signaling cascade to fatty acid oxidation.
    • Example 5 AICAR and Resveratrol Stimulate AMPK and ACC Phosphorylation
  • RNA inactivation of AMPK and COT suggested that the effect of resveratrol and AICAR to mobilize fat in worms is dependent on activation of the AMPK signaling cascade to fatty acid oxidation. To obtain direct evidence of AMPK activation, we examined whether resveratrol-stimulated cells show increased phosphorylation of threonine residue 172 in AMPK or increased phosphorylation of acetyl coA carboxylase (ACC) at serine 79, modifications that correlate with activation of AMPK and inactivation of ACC, respectively.
  • CHO-HIR mammalian cells were washed in PBS and incubated overnight in serum-free DMEM before treatment with 500 μM AICAR (positive control) or 12.5 μM, 25 μM or 50 μM resveratrol. Cells were harvested after 30 minutes and lysates were immediately boiled in SDS and subjected to Western analysis with site-specific antibodies. Phosphorylation of AMPK at Thr172 indicates activation of the kinase. Active AMPK phosphorylates and inactivates ACC at serine 79.
  • The results, which are shown in FIG. 6, indicate phosphorylation of AMPK on threonine 172 and phosphorylation of ACC on serine 79. Thus, like, AICAR, resveratrol stimulates phosphorylation of AMPK and ACC. Accordingly, the ability of resveratrol to mobilize fat from lipogenic tissues is due, at least in part, to activation of AMPK signaling to fatty acid oxidation.
  • CHO cells were also treated with 500 μM AICAR (positive control), DMSO, 100 nM, 500 nM, 2.5 μM, 12.5 μM, 25 μM, or 50 μM resveratrol and subject to Western Blot analysis as described above. Western blots were stripped and re-probed for phosphorylated (active) AMPK, total AMPK, phosphorylated acetyl CoA carboxylase (ACC), which is the downstream target of AMPK, and tubulin, which served as a loading control. FIG. 7 shows activation of AMPK in CHO cells with increasing concentrations of resveratrol.
  • Phosphorylation of ACC, which reflects AMPK activity, was also observed in 3T3-L1 adipocytes treated with either ethanol or resveratrol. 3T3-L1 cells were incubated with either ethanol or resveratrol and then harvested either 6 or 10 days after they were induced to differentiate into adipocytes from the parent 3T3 fibroblast cell line. FIG. 8 shows that resveratrol stimulated the phosphorylation of ACC at both day 6 and day 10. ACC was also phosphorylated when the cells were incubated in serum free media overnight before harvesting (lanes marked “SF”). The reason for the extra band in the SIRT1 blot at day 6 is unknown, but we hypothesize that it may be a modified form of SIRT1. Tubulin served as a loading control.
  • Similar results were also observed for HEP3B human hepatoma cells. In this case phosphorylation of ACC was measured in cells were SIRT1 was overexpressed (see FIG. 9, 4 right lanes) and in cells were SIRT1 was knocked down (FIG. 9, left lane). Phosphorylation of ACC was not affected indicating that resveratrol may not be working through SIRT1 in this case. Tubulin served as a loading control.
  • To further investigate whether resveratrol is working through SIRT1, 3T3-L1 apidocytes were infected with a control (GFP) retrovirus, SIRT1, SIRT1 siRNA, or SIRT1 dominant negative (delta HY). Cells were treated with AICAR, ethanol, or resveratrol. As described above, cells were harvested and lysates were prepared for Western blot analysis with site-specific antibodies. FIG. 10 shows phosphorylation of ACC and AMPK, which reflects AMPK activity. Total protein for each is also shown. It is also noted that the loading controls, GAPDH and tubulin, are expressed but at extremely low levels in these cells and may only reflect the presence of undifferentiated 3T3 cells. FIG. 10 also shows a separate dose-response curve on the far right.
  • Similar results were also observed in mouse embryonic fibroblast (MEFs). FIG. 11 shows that resveratrol still has effects in the absence of the known AMPK kinase, LKB1. Cells in the left panel were incubated overnight without serum before harvesting; the cells on the right were not incubated under serum free conditions. While loading is lower for the LKB1 -/- cells, resveratrol still causes an upregulation of both AMPK and ACC phosphorylation. Tubulin served as a loading control.
    • Example 6 Resveratrol Stimulates Fat Mobilization and Inhibits Adipogenesis in Mammalian Cells
  • To obtain evidence that resveratrol affects fat metabolism in a physiologically relevant cell, we examined the effect of increasing concentrations of resveratrol on 3T3-L1 and NIH3T3 cell differentiation and fat content. 3T3-L1 or NIH3T3 cells were grown to confluence and allowed to pack in for 2 days at which point differentiation was initiated by addition of isobutylmethylxanthine, dexamethasone and insulin in the presence of vehicle (ethanol alone) or resveratrol at concentrations of 0, 12.5 and 25 μM. After 10 days of differentiation, fat content was assessed by Oil Red O staining, as described below. The results, which are shown in FIG. 12, indicate that concentrations of 25 μM or higher resveratrol decreased the quantity of cellular fat in 3T3-L1 and NIH3T3 cells. The results in NIH3T3 cells confirm the results obtained in C. elegans. The results indicate that resveratrol inhibits adipogenesis (or adipocyte differentiation).
  • AICAR stimulates AMPK signaling and inhibits adipogenesis in 3T3 cells. To distinguish whether the effect of resveratrol was to inhibit differentiation or mobilize fat from 3T3 cells, we examined whether resveratrol inhibited the expression o f adipogenic transcription regulators such as PPAR-γ. We found that cells exposed to resveratrol did not show an increase in PPAR-γ RNA, which typically accompany differentiation of the cells into adipocytes. This suggests that resveratrol inhibits differentiation of cells into adipocytes. This may also suggest that resveratrol inhibits PPAR-γ activity or expression.
  • We then infected 3T3 preadipoctyes/adipocytes with pMX alone or pMX encoding PPAR-γ and examined the effect of resveratrol on 3T3 cell differentiation. 3T3-L1 and NIH3T3 cells were infected with a plasmid expressing GFP or PPAR-γ and grown to confluence. Cells were differentiated into adipocytes as described below in the presence of 0 μM, 25 μM or 50 μM resveratrol in vehicle (ethanol). After eight days of differentiation, cells were fixed and stained with Oil red O. As expected, overexpression of PPAR-γ partially negated inhibition of 3T 3 preadipocyte differentiation by resveratrol (FIG. 13). This observation suggests that resveratrol inhibits PPAR-γ activated fat cell differentiation.
  • To further examine whether resveratrol activation of sir2 could promote fat mobilization or inhibition of differentiation in mammalian cells, we infected growing cells with wild-type SIRT1 or a deacetylase deficient form of SIRT1. NIH3T3 cells were grown in the presence of virus encoding GFP, SIRT1 or the deacetylase deficient form of SIRT1 (SIRT1ΔHY) (described in Vaziri et al. (2001) Cell 107: 149). Cells were differentiated into adipocytes in the presence of 0 μM, 12.5 μM or 25 μM resveratrol in vehicle (ethanol). After eight days of differentiation, cells were fixed and stained with Oil red O. The results, which are shown in FIG. 14, indicate that 3T3 cells that overexpress wild-type SIRT 1 show decreased fat content as compared to cells infected with virus encoding GFP (a negative control), while 3T3 cells that overexpress the deacetylase deficient form of SIRT1 show an increase in fat content. These results confirm the effect seen in worms, i.e., that SIRT activation by resveratrol appears to decrease fat content and SIRT1 inactivation by nicotinamide appears to increase fat content. Thus we conclude that sirtuins play a direct role in regulating fat cell differentiation and content.
  • The decrease in Oil Red O staining seen with SIRT1 overexpression approaches the level seen when cells are stimulated with resveratrol. This observation raised the question whether the SIRT1 deacetylase deficient mutant would reverse the effect of resveratrol. We found that in the SIRT1 deacetylase deficient mutant, the decrease in fat content normally induced by resveratrol was indeed partially reduced.
  • Thus, these results indicate that, in addition to reducing fat accumulation, resveratrol inhibits adipogenesis, and that this inhibition is also mediated at least in part by Sir2.
    • Example 7 Materials and Methods for Examples 3-6
  • Strains
  • C. elegans strains were maintained as described at 25° C., except when noted (Brenner (1974) Genetics 77: 71). The wild type reference strain was N2 Bristol; the mutant strains were: sir-2.1(ok434), TO1C8.1(ok524), and daf-16 (mgDf47). Daf-16 (mgDf47) was obatined from the Ruvkun laboratory, MGH; all other strains were obtained from the Caenorhabditis Genetics Center (from C. Elegans Gene Knockout Consortium). Growth conditions and resveratrol exposure.
  • Synchronized starved L1 worms were grown in the presence of Nile Red. Strains were grown on NGM plates at 25° C. for approximately 48 hours until the young adult stage was reached. 20-30 young adult worms were then washed 2× with M9 buffer and transferred to new NGM/Nile red experimental plates that contained either OP50 or HTT5 E. coli carrying the L4440 RNAi control vector. For experiments comparing the effect of nicotinamide and resveratrol on fat mobilization, OP50 plates were coated with vehicle alone or Nicotinamide (in PBS), or vehicle alone and Resveratrol (in Ethanol or DMSO).
  • RNAi plates were seeded with HTT5 E. coli carrying either the L4440 RNAi vector control or the specific RNAi clones TO1C8.1, AMPK; R11A8.4, sir-2.1; or F41E7.6 COT in the presence or absence of 100 μM resveratrol. Young adults were transferred to plates containing the appropriate vector, Nile Red stain and drug then maintained at 25° C. Nile Red staining was assessed 24 hours after resveratrol treatment by UV microscopy.
  • Resveratrol/Nicotinamide Dilutions
  • Resveratrol (Indofine #024964) was dissolved in Ethanol or DMSO to a 10 mM stock solution. Resveratrol was added to 60 mm NGM agar dishes containing either OP50 or RNAi expressing bacteria (HT115) to a final concentration of 10 μm, 50 μm, and 100 μM. Nile Red was also added to plates to a final concentration of 0.05 μg/ml. Nicotinamide (Supelco # 47865-U) was diluted in PBS including Nile Red and added to 60 mM dishes containing OP50 to a final concentration of 1 mM, 10 mM, or 100 mM.
  • Fat Staining
  • Nile Red: Nile Red Powder (Sigma #N-3013) was dissolved in acetone at 500 μg/ml, diluted in 1× Phosphate Buffered Saline (PBS) including appropriate drug and applied to surface of Nematode Growth Media (NGM) plates previously seeded with OP50 or RNAi bacteria, at a final concentration of 0.05 μg/ml. Fat content was monitored and recorded by fluorescence microscopy.
  • Fluorescence Microscopy and Image Acquisition
  • Nile Red Staining was visualized by using a Nikon TE2000S microscope equipped with a CY3 filter (emission 535-685 nm). Images were captured using a SPOT RT monochrome digital camera attached to the Nikon Microscope with SPOT RT software v3.5. All Nile red images were acquired using identical settings and exposure times and then changed to red palette.
  • Feeding RNAi
  • HT115 E. Coli carrying the RNAi vector, L4440, were used for maintenance media containing 50 μg/ml ampicillin for 18 hours. 350 μl of each culture was spotted to a 60 mm dish containing NGM agar, 6 mM IPTG and 25 μg/ml carbenicillin. After overnight incubation (at room temp), Nile Red was added on top of each dish to a final concentration of 0.05 μg/ml along with the experimental compounds indicated in the figure legends. Nile Red staining was assessed after 24 hrs by UV microscopy. For each batch of RNAi clones tested, L4440 (vector alone) was included. A phenotype was assigned only if a majority of the animals displayed the phenotype. All phenotypes were confirmed by at least three additional rounds of testing.
  • Cell Culture and Oil Red O Staining
  • 3T3-L1 and NIH3T3 cells were maintained in DMEM plus 10% calf serum. Adipocyte differentiation of 3T3-L1 cells was performed as described previously (MacDougald, O. A. and Lane, M. D. (1995). Transcriptional regulation of gene expression during adipocyte differentiation. Annu. Rev. Biochem. 64, 345-373). NIH3T3 cells were induced to form adipocytes under the same conditions as 3T3-L1 cells, but with 6 days of treatment with insulin, dexamethasone, and isobutylmethylxanthine in 10% fetal calf serum after cells reach confluence. The staining of adipocytes with Oil Red-O and quantitation was performed as described previously (Ramirez-Zacarias J L, Castro-Munozledo F, Kuri-Harcuch W Histochemistry. 1992 July; 97(6): 493-7).
  • Retrovirus Production and Infection
  • The mammalian retrovirus expression vector pMX (described in Tontonoz et al. (1994) Genes Dev. 8: 1224, and provided by Gary Nolan) was used to construct and express full-length murine PPARγ2 (Tontonoz et al., supra), human SIRT1, human SIRT1ΔHY (Vaziri et al., supra) and eGFP. Recombinant retroviruses were generated by calcium phosphate transfection of the retroviral constructs into Phoenix ecotropic packaging cells (described in Tontonoz et al., supra, and provided by Gary Nolan), which were maintained in DMEM plus 10% fetal calf serum. Media was changed the next day and viral supernatant was harvested twice at 48 and 72 hr post-transfection of packaging cells. Viral supernatant was passed through a 0.2 μM syringe filter and applied to pre-confluent 3T3-L1 and NIH3T3 cells after addition of polybrene to a final concentration of 6 μg/ml. Media was changed the next day and cells were allowed to grow to confluence before differentiation to adipocytes.
    • Example 8 Additional Sirtuin Activators Stimulate Fat Mobilization
  • C. elegans worms were incubated in the presence or absence of 100 μM of the SIRT1 activators butein, fisetin, piceatannol and quercetin, and the fat content of the worms measured as described above. The results, which are shown in FIG. 15, indicated that these SIRT1 activators have a similar effect as resveratrol, i.e., they stimulate fat mobilization. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, quercetin and fisetin reduce fat accumulation at concentrations as low as 10 μM.
    • Example 9 Effects of Resveratrol Analogues on Fat Accumulation in C. elegans
  • C. elegans worms were incubated in the absence (1% v/v DMSO) or presence of 100 μM 3,5-dihydroxy-4′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene for 24 hours. Significant reduction of fat staining by 3,5-dihydroxy-4′-thiomethyl-trans-stilbene was observed (FIG. 18). Animals in L1 were also incubated in the absence (2.5% v/v DMSO) or presence of 100 μM resveratrol or 100 μM cis-stilbene for 48 hours. Significant reduction of fat staining by resveratrol is observed. No significant effect on worm fat staining is observed with cis-stilbene compared to the control (FIG. 19). Fat accumulation was visualized with Nile Red, a lipophilic stain, as described in Ashrafi et al., Nature 421: 268-27 (2003).
    • Example 10 Effects of Resveratrol on TNF-Alpha Treated Adipocytes that are Insulin Resistant
  • This example shows that resveratrol boosts insulin sensitivity of adipocytes. Adipocytes were treated with TNF-alpha to induce insulin resistance as described in Kabayama et al., Glycobiology 15: 21-29 (2005) and Wu et al., Mol. Cell 3: 151-8 (1999). Treatment with roziglitazone, a positive control, increases the uptake of radioactive glucose indicating increased insulin senstivity of the TNF-alpha treated adipocytes. As shown in FIG. 20, treatment with 5 μM or 15 μM resveratrol partially rescued the TNF-alpha treated adipocytes restoring insulin sensitivity in the treated cells. The arrow in FIG. 20, shows the desired effect of increased radioactive-glucose uptake.
    • Example 11 Resveratrol, Like Other AMPK Activators, Can Stimulate Fatty Acid Oxidation in Lipogenic Cells
  • Insulin is the major hormone charged with promoting storage of excess energy as fat. In cells with lipogenic capacity, insulin signaling promotes fat deposition. When fat stores become excessive this process is referred to as dyslipogenesis. Dyslipogenesis, is associated with insulin resistance and the progressive increase in circulating insulin and triglycerides levels, propensity to hypertension, and atherosclerosis that is characteristic of metabolic syndrome [Muller-Wieland, D. and J. Kotzka, SREBP-1: gene regulatory key to syndrome X? Ann N Y Acad Sci, 2002. 967: p. 19-27]. Insulin sensitizers, such as AICAR (5-aminoimidazole-4-carboxamide-1-beta-D-ribofuranoside) and metformin, activate AMP kinase and mobilize fat from non-adipose cells thereby reducing insulin resistance and serum lipid levels [Lin, H. Z., et al., Metformin reverses fatty liver disease in obese, leptin-deficient mice. Nat Med, 2000. 6(9): p. 998-1003; Bergeron, R., et al., Effect of 5-aminoimidazole-4-carboxamide-1-beta-D-ribofuranoside infusion on in vivo glucose and lipid metabolism in lean and obese Zucker rats. Diabetes, 2001. 50(5): p. 1076-82]. Ample evidence exists that polyphenolic compounds derived from wine reduce serum lipid levels and atherosclerotic plaque [Waddington, E., I. B. Puddey, and K. D. Croft, Red wine polyphenolic compounds inhibit atherosclerosis in apolipoprotein E-deficient mice independently of effects on lipid peroxidation. Am J Clin Nutr, 2004. 79(1): p. 54-61]. Our observation that resveratrol activates AMP kinase suggested that this drug, analogous to AICAR and metformin, might be effective in reducing dyslipogenesis and increasing insulin sensitivity.
  • A plethora of reports indicate that AICAR and metformin activate AMPK, which in turn phosphorylates and inhibits acetyl coA carboxylase (ACC) (reviews by Kemp, B. E., et al., Dealing with energy demand: the AMP-activated protein kinase. Trends Biochem Sci, 1999. 24(1): p. 22-5; Kemp, B. E., et al., AMP-activated protein kinase, super metabolic regulator. Biochem Soc Trans, 2003. 31(Pt 1): p. 162-8; Viollet, B., et al., The AMP-activated protein kinase alpha2 catalytic subunit controls whole-body insulin sensitivity. J Clin Invest, 2003. 111(1): p. 91-8; Viollet, B., et al., Physiological role of AMP-activated protein kinase (AMPK): insights from knockout mouse models. Biochem Soc Trans, 2003. 31(Pt 1): p. 216-9; Ruderman, N. B., et al., Malonyl-CoA, fuel sensing, and insulin resistance. Am J Physiol, 1999. 276(1 Pt 1): p. E1-E18; Mu, J., E. R. Barton, and M. J. Birnbaum, Selective suppression of AMP-activated protein kinase in skeletal muscle: update on ‘lazy mice’. Biochem Soc Trans, 2003. 31(Pt 1): p. 236-41; and Zhou, G., et al., Role of AMP-activated protein kinase in mechanism of metformin action. J Clin Invest, 2001. 108(8): p. 1167-74). Inactivating ACC has the dual effect of inhibiting de novo fat biosynthesis and releasing fatty acid transferases carnitine-palmatoyl transferase-1 CPT-1) and carnitine octanloyl transferase (COT) from end product inhibition by malonyl coA [Morillas, M., et al., Identification of the two histidine residues responsible for the inhibition by malonyl-CoA in peroxisomal carnitine octanoyltransferase from rat liver. FEBS Lett, 2000. 466(1): p. 183-6]. The result is decreased de novo fat biosynthesis and increased fatty acid oxidation FAO with a consequent decrease in cellular fat content.
  • Having shown that resveratrol increases phosphorylation of AMP kinase and ACC, see FIG. 7, we confirmed that resveratrol stimulates CO2 production from palmitate in two hepatoma cell lines (Table 1). The 3- to 6-fold increase in CO2 production mirrors the stimulation achieved with AICAR. In sum, our data suggests that resveratrol can stimulate fat mobilization by activating AMPK signaling to the lipogenic enzyme ACC, reducing production of malonyl coA. The latter event inhibits the flow of substrate into de novo fat biosynthesis and stimulates fatty acid oxidation.
    TABLE 1
    Resveratrol, like other AMPK activators, can stimulate fatty acid
    oxidation. Oxidation of 14C-palmitate in hepatoma cells
    stimulated with vehicle control (1% DMSO or H2O as appropriate),
    resveratrol (10 μM in 1% DMSO), AICAR (500 μM in H2O), or
    metformin (1 mM in H2O) for 4 hours as described in Methods.
    The fold effect of resveratrol on C02 production is shown.
    14C —C02 production (nmol/hr/106 cells)
    (Fold Effect)
    Compound Vehicle Resveratrol AICAR Metformin
    H4IIEC3 cells
    1 2.3 2.3 2
    HepG2 cells 1 6 5 3.5

    Method:
  • Oxidation of 14C-palmitate to acid-soluble products (modified from H4IIEC3 cells [Witters, L. A. and B. E. Kemp, Insulin activation of acetyl-CoA carboxylase accompanied by inhibition of the 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase. J Biol Chem, 1992. 267(5): p. 2864-7] and HepG2 cells were maintained as described above. Cells (106 cells/T25) were seeded in a T25 flask one day prior to the experiment. On the day of the experiment cells were washed with assay buffer (114 mM NaCl, 4.7 mM KCL, 1.2 mM KH2PO4, 1.2 mM MgSO4, 11 mM glucose) before labeling with 14C-palmitate (0.4 μCi/ml) in presence of vehicle, or resveratrol (10 μM), or AICAR (500 μM) for 4 hours.
  • At the end of incubation, the cap of each T25 flask was replaced with a stopper and a 1′×1.5″ Whatman filter paper soaked with 250 μl 2N NaOH. Each flask was injected with 2 ml of 6N HCL, placed in a horizontal position for 10 minutes and left standing overnight. The next morning, 1 ml H2O and 61 μl NaOH were added to a glass scintillation vial and the filter papers from each T25 flask were transferred to their respective vial. 10 ml Aquasol was added to each vial and allowed to stand for 2 hours, after which the vials were vortexed to dissolve the NaH14CO2 and counted in the scintillation counter. The results were expressed as nmols/h/106 cells and shown as the fold effect. 14CO2 production ranged from 0.3 to 1.8 nmols/h/106 cells. The experiment was repeated three times.
  • Equivalents
  • Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents of the specific embodiments described herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed by the following claims.

Claims (29)

1. A method for treating or preventing insulin resistance disorder in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an a gent that increases the activity and/or protein level of a sirtuin in a cell.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the agent is a sirtuin-activating compound, or a salt or prodrug thereof.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the sirtuin-activating compound comprises a compound selected from the group of compounds consisting of compounds of formulas 1-18.
4. The method of claim 3, wherein the sirtuin-activating compound is resveratrol, fisetin, butein, piceatannol or quercetin.
5. The method of claim 1, further comprising administering to the subject a second agent that: (i) increases the activity or protein level of a sertuin in a cell; increases the activity or protein level of 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase (AMPK) in a cell; or is an anti-diabetic agent.
6. The method claim 5, wherein the second agent is an anti-diabetic agent.
7. A method for reducing the weight of a subject, or preventing weight gain in a subject, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin in a cell.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein the agent is a sirtuin-activating compound, or a salt or prodrug thereof.
9. The method of claim 7, wherein the sirtuin-activating compound comprises a compound formula selected from the group of compounds consisting of compounds of formulas 1-18.
10. The method of claim 9, wherein the sirtuin-activating compound is resveratrol, fisetin, butein, piceatannol or quercetin.
11. The method of claim 7, further comprising administering to the subject a second agent that: (i) increases the activity or protein level of a sertuin in a cell; increases the activity or protein level of 5′-AMP-activated protein kinase (AMPK) in a cell; or is an anti-obesity agent.
12. The method claim 11, wherein the second agent is an anti-obesity agent.
13. A method for promoting weight gain in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an agent that reduces the activity or protein level of a sirtuin in a cell.
14. The method of claim 13, wherein the agent is a sirtuin-inhibitory compound.
15. The method of claim 13, wherein the sirtuin-inhibitory compound comprises a formula selected from the group consisting of formulas 19-21.
16. The method of claim 13, wherein the sirtuin-inhibitory compound is nicotinamide.
17. The method of claim 13, further comprising administering to the subject a second agent.
18. The method of claim 13, wherein the second agent is a weight gain-promoting agent.
19. The method of claim 1, wherein the subject is human.
20. The method of claim 7, wherein the subject is human.
21. The method of claim 13, wherein the subject a human.
22. A method for preventing fat accumulation in a cell with lipogenic capacity, comprising contacting the cell with an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin.
23. A method for enhancing fat accumulation in, or adipogenesis of, a cell, comprising contacting a cell with an agent that decreases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin.
24. The method of claim 22, wherein the cell with lipogenic capacity is a liver, pancreas or muscle cells.
25. The method of claim 23, wherein the cell is an adipocyte.
26. A method for preventing the differentiation of a pre-adipocyte, comprising contacting the pre-adipocyte with an agent that increases the activity or protein level of a sirtuin in a cell, such that the differentiation of the pre-adipocyte is inhibited.
27. The method of claim 26, wherein the cell, is in vitro.
28. A method for identifying an agent that modulates weight or weight gain, comprising:
(i) identifying an agent that modulates a sirtuin; and
(ii) determining the effect of the agent on weight gain, wherein the presence of an effect of the agent on weight or weight gain indicates that the agent modulates weight or weight gain.
29. A method for identifying an agent for treating or preventing obesity, insulin resistance, metabolic syndrome or diabetes in a subject, comprising:
(i) identifying an agent that activates a sirtuin; and
(ii) determining the effect of the agent on obesity, insulin resistance, metabolic syndrome or diabetes, wherein a decrease in the presence, degree or occurrence of obesity, insulin resistance, metabolic syndrome or diabetes indicates that the agent is an agent for treating or preventing these conditions.
US11/027,779 2003-12-29 2004-12-29 Compositions for treating or preventing obesity and insulin resistance disorders Abandoned US20050171027A1 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/027,779 US20050171027A1 (en) 2003-12-29 2004-12-29 Compositions for treating or preventing obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US11/174,000 US8017634B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2005-07-01 Compositions for treating obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US12/683,998 US8242171B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2010-01-07 Method for reducing the weight of a subject or inhibiting weight gain in a subject
US13/192,011 US8846724B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2011-07-27 Compositions for treating obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US14/460,397 US9597347B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2014-08-15 Compositions for treating obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US15/424,759 US20170216272A1 (en) 2003-12-29 2017-02-03 Compositions for treating or preventing obesity and insulin resistance disorders

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US53371203P 2003-12-29 2003-12-29
US58864304P 2004-07-16 2004-07-16
US11/027,779 US20050171027A1 (en) 2003-12-29 2004-12-29 Compositions for treating or preventing obesity and insulin resistance disorders

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/174,000 Continuation-In-Part US8017634B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2005-07-01 Compositions for treating obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US12/683,998 Continuation US8242171B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2010-01-07 Method for reducing the weight of a subject or inhibiting weight gain in a subject

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20050171027A1 true US20050171027A1 (en) 2005-08-04

Family

ID=34753009

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/027,779 Abandoned US20050171027A1 (en) 2003-12-29 2004-12-29 Compositions for treating or preventing obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US12/683,998 Active US8242171B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2010-01-07 Method for reducing the weight of a subject or inhibiting weight gain in a subject

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/683,998 Active US8242171B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2010-01-07 Method for reducing the weight of a subject or inhibiting weight gain in a subject

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (2) US20050171027A1 (en)
EP (1) EP1708689A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2007527418A (en)
CN (1) CN101247793B (en)
AU (1) AU2004312072B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2548671C (en)
WO (1) WO2005065667A2 (en)

Cited By (55)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050158376A1 (en) * 2003-10-23 2005-07-21 Sardi William F. Dietary supplement and method of processing same
US20060084085A1 (en) * 2004-06-16 2006-04-20 Sinclair David A Methods and compositions for modulating Bax-mediated apoptosis
US20060173070A1 (en) * 2005-01-31 2006-08-03 Kao Corporation Method of enhancing motor function
US20060276393A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2006-12-07 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel compositions for preventing and treating neurodegenerative and blood coagulation disorders
US20060276416A1 (en) * 2005-01-20 2006-12-07 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating flushing and drug induced weight gain
JP2007228855A (en) * 2006-02-28 2007-09-13 Univ Of Tokushima Method for screening antiobestic agent
WO2007146654A1 (en) * 2006-06-08 2007-12-21 The Salk Institute For Biological Studies Methods for identifying candidate fat-mobilizing agents
US20080171707A1 (en) * 2005-03-14 2008-07-17 Scalime Nutrition Use Of An Onion Extract For Making A Composition To Control Weight Gain
CN101371837A (en) * 2007-08-21 2009-02-25 中国科学院上海生命科学研究院 Uses of B vitamins nicotinic amide in regulating body weight, blood sugar and insulin sensibility
US20090117543A1 (en) * 2004-05-04 2009-05-07 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Methods and compositions for inducing sirtuins
US20090137681A1 (en) * 2005-04-08 2009-05-28 David A Sinclair Sirtuin Inhibiting Compounds
US20090142335A1 (en) * 2005-02-15 2009-06-04 Joslin Diabetes Center Methods of diagnosis and treatment of metabolic disorders
US20090169585A1 (en) * 2003-10-23 2009-07-02 Resveratrol Partners, Llc Resveratrol-Containing Compositions And Their Use In Modulating Gene Product Concentration Or Activity
US20090215681A1 (en) * 2005-02-15 2009-08-27 Joslin Diabetes Center Methods of Diagnosis and Treatment of Metabolic Disorders
US20100047177A1 (en) * 2007-01-26 2010-02-25 Washington University Methods and compositions for treating neuropathies
US20100112099A1 (en) * 2008-11-04 2010-05-06 Metaproteomics, Llc Phytochemical compositions and methods for activating amp-kinase
US7732475B2 (en) 2005-07-14 2010-06-08 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Histone deacetylase inhibitors
US20100159021A1 (en) * 2008-12-23 2010-06-24 Paul Davis Small Molecule Ligands of the Integrin RGD Recognition Site and Methods of Use
US20100185006A1 (en) * 2004-01-20 2010-07-22 Brigham Young University Novel sirtuin activating compounds and processes for making the same
US20100209382A1 (en) * 2005-09-16 2010-08-19 Ordway Research Institute, Inc. Polyphenol Conjugates as RGD-Binding Compounds and Methods of Use
US20100255108A1 (en) * 2009-03-31 2010-10-07 Hung-Yun Lin Combination Treatment of Cancer With Cetuximab and Tetrac
US20100292243A1 (en) * 2009-05-12 2010-11-18 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. 7-([1,2,4]TRIAZOLO[1,5-a]PYRIDIN-6-YL)-4-(3,4-DICHLOROPHENYL)-1,2,3,4-TETRAHYDROISOQUINOLINE AND USE THEREOF
US20100292242A1 (en) * 2009-05-12 2010-11-18 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycle substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof
US20100292250A1 (en) * 2009-05-12 2010-11-18 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. CRYSTALLINE FORMS OF (S)-7-([1,2,4]TRIAZOLO[1,5-a]PYRIDIN-6-YL)-4-(3,4-DICHLOROPHENYL)-1,2,3,4- TETRAHYDROISOQUINOLINE AND USE THEREOF
WO2010151625A1 (en) * 2009-06-25 2010-12-29 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods for treating and diagnosing glucose metabolic syndrome
US20110052715A1 (en) * 2009-06-17 2011-03-03 Davis Paul J Nanoparticle and polymer formulations for thyroid hormone analogs, antagonists, and formulations and uses thereof
US20110082189A1 (en) * 2007-10-23 2011-04-07 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Use of compounds activating sirt-3 for mimicking exercise
US20110142941A1 (en) * 2006-12-22 2011-06-16 Davis Paul J Nanoparticle and Polymer Formulations for Thyroid Hormone Analogs, Antagonists, and Formulations and Uses Thereof
US7977049B2 (en) 2002-08-09 2011-07-12 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Methods and compositions for extending the life span and increasing the stress resistance of cells and organisms
US8017634B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2011-09-13 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions for treating obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US20120041070A1 (en) * 2009-03-31 2012-02-16 Shengfang Jin Methods of treating cancer having an aberrant egfr or kras genotype
US8242171B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2012-08-14 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Method for reducing the weight of a subject or inhibiting weight gain in a subject
TWI417088B (en) * 2011-08-10 2013-12-01 Univ Kaohsiung Medical Composition for treating diabetes and metabolic diseases and a preparation method thereof
US8668926B1 (en) 2003-09-15 2014-03-11 Shaker A. Mousa Nanoparticle and polymer formulations for thyroid hormone analogs, antagonists, and formulations thereof
KR101402921B1 (en) * 2013-08-28 2014-06-02 전남대학교산학협력단 Use of resveratol derivatives for treating obesity or type 2 diabetes
US8741901B2 (en) 2004-07-15 2014-06-03 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US8802240B2 (en) 2011-01-06 2014-08-12 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Uses of formulations of thyroid hormone analogs and nanoparticulate forms thereof to increase chemosensitivity and radiosensitivity in tumor or cancer cells
WO2014138426A2 (en) * 2013-03-07 2014-09-12 Topokine Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for reducing body fat and adipocytes
US8907108B2 (en) 2012-10-26 2014-12-09 Industrial Technology Research Institute P-type organic semiconductor material and optoelectronic device utilizing the same
US8916528B2 (en) 2011-11-16 2014-12-23 Resveratrol Partners, Llc Compositions containing resveratrol and nucleotides
US9198887B2 (en) 2003-09-15 2015-12-01 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Thyroid hormone analogs and methods of use
US9241916B2 (en) 2005-06-14 2016-01-26 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Cognitive performance with sirtuin activators
CN105832717A (en) * 2008-07-25 2016-08-10 爱默蕾大学 Treatment of various disorders with 7,8-dihydroxyflavone and derivatives thereof
US9498476B2 (en) 2008-06-04 2016-11-22 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Crystalline form of 6-[(4S)-2-methyl-4-(2-naphthyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl]pyridazin-3-amine
US9498536B2 (en) 2005-09-15 2016-11-22 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Method and composition of thyroid hormone analogues and nanoformulations thereof for treating anti-inflammatory disorders
US9877981B2 (en) 2012-10-09 2018-01-30 President And Fellows Of Harvard College NAD biosynthesis and precursors for the treatment and prevention of cancer and proliferation
US9980933B2 (en) 2003-09-15 2018-05-29 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Thyroid hormone analogs and methods of use
US10130686B2 (en) 2005-09-15 2018-11-20 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Method and composition of thyroid hormone analogues and nanoformulations thereof for treating inflammatory disorders
US10201616B2 (en) 2016-06-07 2019-02-12 Nanopharmaceuticals, Llc Non-cleavable polymer conjugated with αVβ3 integrin thyroid antagonists
US10328043B1 (en) 2018-04-11 2019-06-25 Nanopharmaceuticals, Llc. Composition and method for dual targeting in treatment of neuroendocrine tumors
US20190224122A1 (en) * 2016-09-23 2019-07-25 Delpor, Inc. Stable compositions for incretin mimetic compounds
US10568352B1 (en) * 2018-10-25 2020-02-25 Wiser Concepts, LLC Nutritional compositions and methods of treatment therewith
US10961204B1 (en) 2020-04-29 2021-03-30 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Composition of scalable thyrointegrin antagonists with improved blood brain barrier penetration and retention into brain tumors
US11351137B2 (en) 2018-04-11 2022-06-07 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Composition and method for dual targeting in treatment of neuroendocrine tumors
US11723888B2 (en) 2021-12-09 2023-08-15 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Polymer conjugated thyrointegrin antagonists

Families Citing this family (37)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006001278A1 (en) * 2004-06-28 2006-01-05 Kao Corporation Ampk activator
FR2883753B1 (en) * 2005-04-01 2008-04-11 Soc Extraction Principes Actif DERMATOLOGICAL AND / OR COSMETIC COMPOSITION CONTAINING POLYPEPTIDES
AU2006269459B2 (en) * 2005-07-07 2013-02-07 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and related compositions for treating or preventing obesity, insulin resistance disorders, and mitochondrial-associated disorders
US20070077310A1 (en) * 2005-10-03 2007-04-05 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation Methods of reducing the production of reactive oxygen species and methods of screening or identifying compounds and compositions that reduce the production of reactive oxygen species
EP2001561A2 (en) * 2006-03-31 2008-12-17 DSMIP Assets B.V. Novel use of compounds and combinations of compunds for improving the physical appearance
JP2007314446A (en) * 2006-05-24 2007-12-06 Kao Corp Ampk(adenosine monophosphate-activated protein kinase) activator
CN101176786A (en) * 2006-11-08 2008-05-14 中国科学院上海生命科学研究院 Method and composition for increasing insulin sensibility
US20090163580A1 (en) * 2007-12-24 2009-06-25 Natrol, Inc. Anti-aging composition containing resveratrol and method of administration
MX2011003373A (en) 2008-09-29 2011-06-09 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals Inc Quinazolinone, quinolone and related analogs as sirtuin modulators.
RU2484827C2 (en) 2008-11-04 2013-06-20 Юниверсити Оф Кентукки Рисерч Фаундэйшн D-tagatose compositions and methods of preventing and treating atherosclerosis, metabolic syndrome and symptoms thereof
US9050284B2 (en) * 2009-02-09 2015-06-09 Sami Labs Limited Orally bioavailable stilbenoids—compositions and therapeutic applications thereof
JP2012520342A (en) 2009-03-16 2012-09-06 ジェンメディカ・セラピューティックス・ソシエダッド・リミターダ Anti-inflammatory and antioxidant conjugates useful for treating metabolic disorders
EP2432320A4 (en) * 2009-05-20 2013-03-06 Nutracryst Therapeutics Private Ltd Pharmaceutical co-crystals of quercetin
JP5594719B2 (en) * 2010-01-06 2014-09-24 国立大学法人神戸大学 Muscle sugar uptake promoter
CN107988228B (en) * 2010-05-03 2022-01-25 库尔纳公司 Treatment of Sirtuin (SIRT) related diseases by inhibition of natural antisense transcript to Sirtuin (SIRT)
WO2013002880A1 (en) 2011-06-29 2013-01-03 The General Hospital Corporation Compositions and methods for enhancing bioenergetic status in female germ cells
MX2014000419A (en) * 2011-07-15 2014-09-22 Nusirt Sciences Inc Compositions and methods for modulating metabolic pathways.
US9198454B2 (en) 2012-03-08 2015-12-01 Nusirt Sciences, Inc. Compositions, methods, and kits for regulating energy metabolism
US9682093B2 (en) 2012-03-30 2017-06-20 Charles R. Drew University Of Medicine And Science Compositions and methods for treating or preventing metabolic syndrome disorders
CN103387508A (en) * 2012-05-07 2013-11-13 长沙理工大学 Preparation of tans-3,5- dihydroxy-4'- acetylamido-stilbene
JP5948139B2 (en) * 2012-05-11 2016-07-06 ヒノキ新薬株式会社 Sirtuin 1 (SIRT1) gene activator
CN108452311A (en) 2012-11-13 2018-08-28 纽斯尔特科学公司 Composition for enhancing energetic supersession and method
US20140271923A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-09-18 Christopher Brian Reid Compositions & formulations for preventing and treating chronic diseases that cluster in patients such as cardiovascular disease, diabetes, obesity, polycystic ovary syndrome, hyperlipidemia and hypertension, as well as for preventing and treating other diseases and conditions
CN105228627B (en) 2013-03-15 2018-07-13 纽斯尔特科学公司 Leucine and niacin reduce lipid level
WO2014180908A1 (en) * 2013-05-08 2014-11-13 Deutsches Krebsforschungszentrum Acip/peptide-based inhibition of cancer cachexia
CN106456997B (en) 2014-02-27 2018-12-28 纽斯尔特科学公司 For reducing or preventing the composition and method of hepatic steatosis
WO2016029870A1 (en) 2014-08-28 2016-03-03 康霈生技股份有限公司 Composition for reducing local fat and body weight, and pharmaceuticals and use thereof
US10226503B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2019-03-12 Caliway Biopharmaceuticals Co., Ltd. Plant extract composition for reducing topical fat and promoting weight loss as well as applications thereof
JP2016185922A (en) * 2015-03-27 2016-10-27 森永製菓株式会社 Agents and methods for enhancing expression of ucp1 gene
WO2017037593A2 (en) 2015-08-28 2017-03-09 康霈生技股份有限公司 Pharmaceutical composition used for reducing localised fat and use of pharmaceutical composition
US11318110B2 (en) 2015-08-28 2022-05-03 Caliway Biopharmaceuticals Co., Ltd. Pharmaceutical composition for reducing local fat and uses thereof
WO2017120731A1 (en) * 2016-01-11 2017-07-20 Shanghai Yao Yuan Biotechnology Co., Ltd. Methods and compositions for reducing body weight
JP6920071B2 (en) 2017-02-16 2021-08-18 ワシントン・ユニバーシティＷａｓｈｉｎｇｔｏｎ Ｕｎｉｖｅｒｓｉｔｙ Adiponectin secretion improver
CN107496411A (en) * 2017-09-21 2017-12-22 上海华堇生物技术有限责任公司 The medicinal usage of fisetin
CN109662962B (en) * 2018-10-26 2022-02-11 中国科学院西北高原生物研究所 Use of oligomeric stilbenes
US20210401728A1 (en) * 2018-10-26 2021-12-30 Ivan GALANIN Topical Compositions and Methods to Promote Optimal Dermal White Adipose Tissue Composition in Vivo
CN115181721A (en) * 2022-07-13 2022-10-14 山东省农业科学院畜牧兽医研究所 Method for inhibiting proliferation of subcutaneous fat cells and fat anabolism of mutton sheep

Citations (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3174901A (en) * 1963-01-31 1965-03-23 Jan Marcel Didier Aron Samuel Process for the oral treatment of diabetes
US4598089A (en) * 1983-06-22 1986-07-01 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Leucine derivatives
US5945109A (en) * 1996-03-29 1999-08-31 S.W. Patentverwertungs Ges.M.B.H. Cosmetic or cosmetic product for firming and smoothing the skin, in particular in the case of cellulite
US6147121A (en) * 1998-04-10 2000-11-14 Societe L'oreal S.A. Skin toning by stimulating collagen synthesis/proliferation of dermal fibroblasts
US20010039296A1 (en) * 2000-03-23 2001-11-08 Debasis Bagchi Method and composition for preventing or reducing the symptoms of menopause
US6319523B1 (en) * 2000-06-29 2001-11-20 James H. Zhou Composition and method for inhibiting oral bacteria
US6331633B1 (en) * 1998-05-08 2001-12-18 Calyx Therapeutics Inc. Heterocyclic analogs of diphenylethylene compounds
US6333441B1 (en) * 1992-03-09 2001-12-25 Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd. Preparation of cis—olefins
US6359017B1 (en) * 1999-02-24 2002-03-19 Geza Bruckner Dietary compositions and methods
US6576660B1 (en) * 1997-10-31 2003-06-10 Arch Development Corporation Methods and compositions for regulation of 5-α-reductase activity
US20030190337A1 (en) * 2002-03-28 2003-10-09 The Procter & Gamble Company Methods for regulating the condition of mammalian keratinous tissue via topical application of vitamin B6 compositions
US6638545B1 (en) * 1999-03-12 2003-10-28 Laboratories Pharmascience Food complement and method for cosmetic treatment based on a grape extract rich in polyphenols
US6638543B2 (en) * 2001-02-27 2003-10-28 Regents Of The University Of Michigan Use of natural EGFR inhibitors to prevent side effects due to retinoid therapy, soaps, and other stimuli that activate the epidermal growth factor receptor
US20040028607A1 (en) * 2002-05-20 2004-02-12 Verdin Eric M. Methods of modulating tubulin deacetylase activity
US20040209952A1 (en) * 2001-11-01 2004-10-21 Min-Young Kim Composition containing chalcone
US20040265861A1 (en) * 2003-02-28 2004-12-30 Goldfarb David S Materials and methods for identifying genes and/or agents that alter replicative lifespan
US20050096256A1 (en) * 2003-07-01 2005-05-05 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions for manipulating the lifespan and stress response of cells and organisms
US20050267023A1 (en) * 2002-08-09 2005-12-01 Sinclair David A Methods and compositions for extending the life span and increasing the stress resistance of cells and organisms
US20060002914A1 (en) * 2004-06-04 2006-01-05 Jeffrey Milbrandt Methods and compositions for treating neuropathies
US20060014705A1 (en) * 2004-06-30 2006-01-19 Howitz Konrad T Compositions and methods for selectively activating human sirtuins
US20060025337A1 (en) * 2003-07-01 2006-02-02 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Sirtuin related therapeutics and diagnostics for neurodegenerative diseases
US20060084085A1 (en) * 2004-06-16 2006-04-20 Sinclair David A Methods and compositions for modulating Bax-mediated apoptosis
US20060111435A1 (en) * 2003-12-29 2006-05-25 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions for treating or preventing obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US20060229265A1 (en) * 2005-03-30 2006-10-12 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nicotinamide riboside and analogues thereof
US20060257502A1 (en) * 2005-05-11 2006-11-16 Jiankang Liu A combination of mitochondrial nutrients for relieving stress, preventing and improving stress-related disorders
US20060276393A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2006-12-07 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel compositions for preventing and treating neurodegenerative and blood coagulation disorders
US20060276416A1 (en) * 2005-01-20 2006-12-07 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating flushing and drug induced weight gain
US20070160586A1 (en) * 2005-06-15 2007-07-12 Children's Medical Center Corporation Methods for extending the replicative lifespan of cells

Family Cites Families (146)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2543550B1 (en) 1983-04-01 1985-08-09 Cortial NOVEL TETRAHYDROXY-3 ', 4', 5.7 FLAVONE DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION METHOD AND THEIR THERAPEUTIC USE
US5689046A (en) 1987-09-30 1997-11-18 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Stilbene synthase gene
DE3733017A1 (en) 1987-09-30 1989-04-13 Bayer Ag Stilbene synthase gene
DE4107396A1 (en) 1990-06-29 1992-01-02 Bayer Ag STYLE SYNTHASE GENES FROM VINEYARD
IL107642A0 (en) 1992-11-20 1994-02-27 Amgen Inc Progenitor b cell stimulating factor
US6048903A (en) 1994-05-03 2000-04-11 Robert Toppo Treatment for blood cholesterol with trans-resveratrol
DE4440200A1 (en) 1994-11-10 1996-05-15 Bayer Ag DNA sequences and their use
DE4444238A1 (en) 1994-12-13 1996-06-20 Beiersdorf Ag Cosmetic or dermatological drug combinations of cinnamic acid derivatives and flavone glycosides
US5589483A (en) 1994-12-21 1996-12-31 Geron Corporation Isoquinoline poly (ADP-ribose) polymerase inhibitors to treat skin diseases associated with cellular senescence
AU6858996A (en) 1995-08-28 1997-03-19 Interlab Corporation Pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of infectious diseases
JP4376977B2 (en) * 1995-09-22 2009-12-02 日本製粉株式会社 Lipase inhibitors, food additives and food
IT1276225B1 (en) 1995-10-17 1997-10-27 Sigma Tau Ind Farmaceuti PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING L-CARNITINE AND ALKANOYL L-CARNITINE IN ASSOCIATION WITH RESVERATROL OR ITS DERIVATIVES USEFUL FOR
FR2741238B1 (en) 1995-11-17 2001-11-30 Goemar Lab Sa USE OF ALUMINUM CHLORIDE AS AN ELICITOR OF RESVERATROL SYNTHESIS
US6124125A (en) 1996-01-08 2000-09-26 Trustees Of Dartmouth College AMP activated protein kinase
US5837252A (en) 1996-07-01 1998-11-17 Larreacorp, Ltd. Nontoxic extract of Larrea tridentata and method of making same
US6184248B1 (en) 1996-09-05 2001-02-06 Robert K. K. Lee Compositions and methods for treatment of neurological disorders and neurodegenerative diseases
US5827898A (en) 1996-10-07 1998-10-27 Shaman Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Use of bisphenolic compounds to treat type II diabetes
IT1291113B1 (en) * 1997-03-20 1998-12-29 Sigma Tau Ind Farmaceuti NUTRITIONAL THERAPEUTIC COMPOSITION FOR SUBJECTS WITH DIABETES MELLITUS
WO1998057928A1 (en) 1997-06-16 1998-12-23 American Home Products Corporation Elevation of hdl cholesterol by 2-(4-chloro -1-aryl-butylidene) -hydrazinecarbothioamides
FR2766176B1 (en) 1997-07-15 1999-10-29 Caudalie COMPOSITIONS BASED ON RESVERATROL DERIVATIVES
US6270780B1 (en) 1997-07-25 2001-08-07 Chesebrough-Pond's Usa Co., Division Of Conopco Cosmetic compositions containing resveratrol
BR9803596A (en) 1997-09-23 2000-04-25 Pfizer Prod Inc Derivatives of resorcinol.
WO1999021565A1 (en) 1997-10-24 1999-05-06 Cornell Research Foundation, Inc. Nutritional supplement for cerebral metabolic insufficiencies
US6414037B1 (en) 1998-01-09 2002-07-02 Pharmascience Pharmaceutical formulations of resveratrol and methods of use thereof
US6008260A (en) 1998-01-09 1999-12-28 Pharmascience Cancer chemopreventative composition and method
AT407821B (en) 1998-03-24 2001-06-25 Franz Dr Stueckler MEDIUM BASED ON NATURAL SUBSTANCES
US6624197B1 (en) 1998-05-08 2003-09-23 Calyx Therapeutics, Inc. Diphenylethylene compounds
US6448450B1 (en) 1998-05-08 2002-09-10 Calyx Therapeutics, Inc. 1-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-ethylene for diabetes treatment
US6245814B1 (en) 1998-05-08 2001-06-12 Calyx Therapeutics, Inc. Diphenylethylene compounds
US6022901A (en) 1998-05-13 2000-02-08 Pharmascience Inc. Administration of resveratrol to prevent or treat restenosis following coronary intervention
WO1999059561A2 (en) 1998-05-18 1999-11-25 Hensley, Kenneth, L. Resveratrol inhibition of myeloperoxidase
US20030086986A1 (en) 1998-08-06 2003-05-08 Bruijn Chris De Ophthalmic, pharmaceutical and other healthcare preparations with naturally occurring plant compounds, extracts and derivatives
US6197834B1 (en) 1998-09-01 2001-03-06 Northeastern Ohio Universities College Of Medicine Method of inhibiting formation of infectious herpes virus particles
DE69931055T2 (en) 1998-09-08 2006-12-07 Cornell Research Foundation, Inc. USE OF CYCLOOXYGENASE-2 INHIBITORS FOR TREATING INFLAMMATORY DISORDERS OF HEAD AND NECK
US6656925B2 (en) 1998-09-09 2003-12-02 Advanced Medical Instruments Composition and method of treating arthritis
IT1302365B1 (en) 1998-10-09 2000-09-05 Sigma Tau Healthscience Spa USE OF CARNITINE AND RESVERATROL TO PRODUCE A COMPOSITION FOR THE PREVENTION OR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT OF BRAIN ALTERATIONS
US20030078212A1 (en) 1998-10-30 2003-04-24 Jia-He Li Pharmaceutical compositions containing poly(adp-ribose) glycohydrolase inhibitors and methods of using the same
US6361815B1 (en) 1998-12-21 2002-03-26 Pure World Botanicals, Inc. Products comprising trihydroxystilbenes and derivatives thereof and methods for their manufacture and use
US6190716B1 (en) 1999-02-17 2001-02-20 Scott O. Galbreath, Jr. Method for preparing a grape derived product
IT1312377B1 (en) 1999-03-05 2002-04-15 Uni Ci S R L COMPOSITIONS BASED ON TIOTIC ACID, CISTEIN AND / OR N-ACETYL CISTEINADA USE IN PHARMACEUTICAL, DIETETIC AND COSMETIC PREPARATIONS
US6878381B2 (en) 1999-03-22 2005-04-12 Pfizer, Inc Resorcinol composition
BR0009592A (en) * 1999-04-05 2002-01-08 Randy H Ziegler Anti-diabetic composition, and, method for treating diabetes mellitus
ATE365326T1 (en) 1999-04-12 2007-07-15 Sumitomo Chemical Co METHOD FOR ANALYZING THE AMOUNT OF INTRA-ABDOMINAL FAT TISSUE
MXPA01011760A (en) 1999-05-18 2003-09-04 Calyx Therapeutics Inc Novel diphenylethylene compounds.
FR2795643B1 (en) 1999-07-02 2004-06-11 Oreal FIRMING COSMETIC COMPOSITION INCLUDING AT LEAST ONE HYDROXYSTILBENE IN ASSOCIATION WITH ASCORBIC ACID
DE60015568D1 (en) 1999-08-13 2004-12-09 Univ Maryland Biotech Inst COMPOSITIONS FOR TREATING VIRAL INFECTIONS AND METHODS THEREFOR
MXPA02002327A (en) 1999-09-03 2004-07-16 Sigma Tau Healthscience Spa Ultrafine l carnitine, methods of preparing the same, compositions containing the same, and methods of using the same.
US6573299B1 (en) 1999-09-20 2003-06-03 Advanced Medical Instruments Method and compositions for treatment of the aging eye
WO2001021165A1 (en) 1999-09-21 2001-03-29 Rutgers, The State University Resveratrol analogs for prevention of disease
US6264995B1 (en) 1999-10-19 2001-07-24 Thomas Newmark Herbal composition for reducing inflammation and methods of using same
US6358517B1 (en) 1999-10-22 2002-03-19 Unilever Home & Personal Care Usa, Division Of Conopco Cosmetic compositions containing resveratrol and retinoids
US20020002200A1 (en) 2000-02-04 2002-01-03 Bishwagit Nag Novel diphenylethylene compounds
US7452664B2 (en) 1999-12-15 2008-11-18 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Methods for identifying agents which alter histone protein acetylation
US6416806B1 (en) 2000-03-20 2002-07-09 James H. Zhou Herbal caffeine replacement composition and food products incorporating same
IT1318425B1 (en) 2000-03-24 2003-08-25 D B P Dev Biotechnological Pro USE OF RESVERATROL FOR THE TREATMENT OF DESQUAMATIVE ECZEMA, ACNE AND PSORIASIS.
IT1317034B1 (en) 2000-05-30 2003-05-26 Istituto Di Medicina Speriment METHOD OF EXTRACTION OF PHARMACEUTICAL ACTIVITY PRODUCTS FROM PLANTS SPERMATOPHYTES, PRODUCTS SO OBTAINED AND THEIR USE IN MEDICINE, IN
US6475530B1 (en) 2000-05-31 2002-11-05 Eric H. Kuhrts Methods and compositions for producing weight loss
ITNA20000036A1 (en) 2000-06-02 2001-12-02 Dev Biotechnological Proces Se NEW THERAPEUTIC APPROACHES FOR THE TREATMENT OF DANDRUFF.
ITNA20000037A1 (en) 2000-06-02 2001-12-02 Dev Biotechnological Proces Se INNOVATIVE MULTIFUNCTION SOLAR FILTER.
IT1318565B1 (en) 2000-06-09 2003-08-27 World Pharma Tech Ltd NADH OCTOCOSANOL EVITAMIN E PROENERGETIC FOOD SUPPLEMENT
WO2001098291A2 (en) 2000-06-20 2001-12-27 Atherogenics, Inc. 1,3-bis-(substituted-phenyl)-2-propen-1-ones and their use to treat vcam-1 mediated disorders
JP4719372B2 (en) * 2000-06-21 2011-07-06 花王株式会社 PPAR-dependent gene transcription activator
US6795856B1 (en) 2000-06-28 2004-09-21 Accountability International, Inc. System and method for monitoring the internet access of a computer
US20020120008A1 (en) 2000-06-29 2002-08-29 Seymour Benzer Life extension of drosophila by a drug treatment
WO2002002190A2 (en) 2000-07-05 2002-01-10 Johns Hopkins School Of Medicine Prevention and treatment of neurodegenerative diseases by glutathione and phase ii detoxification enzymes
DE10034320A1 (en) 2000-07-14 2002-02-07 Inst Pflanzenbiochemie Ipb Process for influencing the sinapine content in transgenic plant cells and plants
FR2812195B1 (en) 2000-07-28 2003-07-11 Oreal TOPICAL APPLICATION COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING GLUCOSYLATED HYDROXYSTILBENES AND UTILIZATIONS
US20020110604A1 (en) 2000-08-11 2002-08-15 Ashni Naturaceuticals, Inc. Composition exhibiting synergistic antioxidant activity
US6541522B2 (en) 2000-08-16 2003-04-01 Insmed Incorporated Methods of using compositions containing hypotriglyceridemically active stilbenoids
US6410596B1 (en) 2000-08-16 2002-06-25 Insmed Incorporated Compositions containing hypoglycemically active stillbenoids
US6552085B2 (en) 2000-08-16 2003-04-22 Insmed Incorporated Compositions containing hypoglycemically active stilbenoids
WO2002017959A2 (en) 2000-08-28 2002-03-07 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Immunosuppression using piceatannol and a calcineurin inhibitor
US20020173511A1 (en) 2000-11-08 2002-11-21 Wurtman Richard J. Serotonergic compositions and methods for treatment of mild cognitive impairment
AU2002217832A1 (en) 2000-11-15 2002-05-27 Rutgers, The State University Of New Jersey Black tea extract for prevention of disease
US20030165854A1 (en) 2000-12-05 2003-09-04 Cunningham Mary Jane Marker genes responding to treatment with toxins
US20030082647A1 (en) 2000-12-12 2003-05-01 Reenan Robert A. Transporter protein
US20040005574A1 (en) 2002-07-08 2004-01-08 Leonard Guarente SIR2 activity
GB0031263D0 (en) 2000-12-21 2001-01-31 Paterson Inst For Cancer Res Materials and methods for synthesizing stilbenes
JP4411414B2 (en) * 2000-12-21 2010-02-10 ザ キグリー コーポレーション Compositions and methods for the treatment of diabetic neuropathy
WO2002056823A2 (en) 2001-01-18 2002-07-25 Arnold Hoffman Redox therapy for tumors
WO2004096256A1 (en) 2001-01-23 2004-11-11 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Methods for preventing and treating loss of balance function due to oxidative stress
FR2820320B1 (en) 2001-02-02 2003-04-04 Oreal SUSPENSION OF LIPOPHILIC ACTIVE INGREDIENT NANOSPHERES STABILIZED BY WATER-DISPERSIBLE POLYMERS
US20030190381A1 (en) 2001-02-02 2003-10-09 Bland Jeffrey S. Medical composition for balancing bodily processes
US20020192310A1 (en) 2001-02-02 2002-12-19 Bland Jeffrey S. Medical composition for managing hormone balance
US20020146424A1 (en) 2001-02-20 2002-10-10 Benza Raymond L. Polyphenolics for enhancing endothelial cell-mediated fibrinolysis
US6300377B1 (en) 2001-02-22 2001-10-09 Raj K. Chopra Coenzyme Q products exhibiting high dissolution qualities
ITPI20010014A1 (en) 2001-03-05 2002-09-05 Ivo Pera COMPOUND FOR FILTERS FOR CIGARETTES, OR OTHER SMOKING ITEMS, BASED ON ANTIOXIDANT SUBSTANCES AND THE FILTER SO OBTAINED
US20030044946A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2003-03-06 Longo Valter D. Genes, mutations, and drugs that increase cellular resistance to damage and extend longevity in organisms from yeast to humans
US6387416B1 (en) 2001-04-05 2002-05-14 Thomas Newmark Anti-Inflammatory herbal composition and method of use
US20030180719A1 (en) 2001-04-13 2003-09-25 Thomas Herget Human cellular protein gastrointestinal glutathione peroxidase as target for medical intervention against hepatitis C virus infections
WO2002085327A2 (en) 2001-04-18 2002-10-31 Oraltech Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Use of nsaids for prevention and treatment of cellular abnormalities of the female reproductive tract
US20030004142A1 (en) 2001-04-18 2003-01-02 Prior Christopher P. Use of NSAIDs for prevention and treatment of cellular abnormalities of the lung or bronchial pathway
US6964969B2 (en) 2001-04-19 2005-11-15 Mccleary Edward Larry Composition and method for treating impaired or deteriorating neurological function
US6426061B1 (en) 2001-04-20 2002-07-30 Weiwei Li Method and composition for preventing sweat-related odor
ATE466577T1 (en) 2001-05-03 2010-05-15 Cornell Res Foundation Inc TREATING ILLNESSES CAUSED BY HPV
US6368617B1 (en) 2001-05-15 2002-04-09 Reliv' International, Inc. Dietary supplement
US7199227B2 (en) 2001-06-14 2007-04-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Polynucleotides encoding human histone deacetylase HDAC9c
WO2002102981A2 (en) 2001-06-15 2002-12-27 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York SIR2α-BASED THERAPEUTIC AND PROPHYLACTIC METHODS
US7384920B2 (en) 2001-07-26 2008-06-10 Institute Of Radiation Medicine, Academy Of Military Medical Sciences, Pla Use of stilbene compounds in the manufacture of medicament for the prevention and treatment of diabetes or retrovirus-associated diseases
US20030044474A1 (en) 2001-08-03 2003-03-06 Shaklee Corporation High molecular weight, lipophilic, orally ingestible bioactive agents in formulations having improved bioavailability
US7396546B2 (en) 2001-08-06 2008-07-08 The Quigley Corporation Anti-microbial compositions and methods of using same
CA2457370A1 (en) 2001-08-15 2003-02-27 Elixir Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Age-associated markers
US6841578B2 (en) 2001-08-16 2005-01-11 Stephen T. Sonis Treatment and prevention of mucositis in cancer patients
US6680342B2 (en) 2001-09-20 2004-01-20 Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research Methods and compositions for inhibiting the proliferation of prostate cancer cells
US20030055114A1 (en) 2001-09-20 2003-03-20 Charles Young Methods and compositions for inhibiting the proliferation of prostate cancer cells
US20030054053A1 (en) 2001-09-20 2003-03-20 Charles Young Methods and compositions for inhibiting the proliferation of prostate cancer cells
US7326685B2 (en) 2001-09-21 2008-02-05 The Administrators Of The Tulane Educational Fund Diagnostic or therapeutic somatostatin or bombesin analog conjugates and uses thereof
US20030082116A1 (en) 2001-09-28 2003-05-01 Closure Medical Corporation Adhesive compositions containing dual function stabilizers and active agents
US7119110B2 (en) 2001-10-05 2006-10-10 Interhealth Nutraceuticals Incorporated Method and composition for preventing or reducing the symptoms of insulin resistance syndrome
CN1599602A (en) 2001-10-11 2005-03-23 钟渊化学工业株式会社 Peroxisome proliferator activated receptor ligands and process for producing the same
AU2002337843A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2003-04-22 Onconova Therapeutics, Inc. Processes for the preparation of substituted isoxazoles and 2-isoxazolines
EP1304161B1 (en) 2001-10-19 2007-02-28 Pacific Corporation Thermotropic liquid crystal polymer microcapsules, a method for preparing the same, and cosmetic compositions containing the same
EP1304048B1 (en) 2001-10-22 2004-09-22 Ivo Pera Composition to reduce or quit smoking addiction
US6767563B2 (en) 2001-10-30 2004-07-27 Michael D. Farley Immune functions
US20030118536A1 (en) 2001-11-06 2003-06-26 Rosenbloom Richard A. Topical compositions and methods for treatment of adverse effects of ionizing radiation
EP1453848A4 (en) 2001-11-21 2009-09-09 Einstein Coll Med Sir2 products and activities
US6544564B1 (en) 2001-11-27 2003-04-08 Michael Donald Farley Cytotoxic pharmaceutical composition
FR2832630B1 (en) 2001-11-28 2005-01-14 Oreal COSMETIC AND / OR DERMATOLOGICAL COMPOSITION CONTAINING AT LEAST ONE OXIDATION-SENSITIVE HYDROPHILIC ACTIVE STABILIZED WITH AT LEAST ONE COPOLYMER OF N-VINYLIMIDAZOLE
US20030118617A1 (en) 2001-12-21 2003-06-26 Avon Products, Inc. Resveratrol analogues
NZ516366A (en) 2001-12-24 2004-07-30 Enzo Nutraceuticals Ltd Increased lifespan formulation using pine bark flavonoid extract
US7406384B2 (en) 2001-12-26 2008-07-29 The Regents Of The University Of California System and method for identifying networks or ternary relationships in complex data systems
EP1474108A2 (en) 2002-01-09 2004-11-10 Enzrel, Inc. Liposome drug delivery of polycyclic, aromatic, antioxidant or anti-inflammatory compounds
JP2003252784A (en) * 2002-02-27 2003-09-10 Kanegafuchi Chem Ind Co Ltd alpha-GLUCOSIDASE INHIBITOR
ES2386782T3 (en) 2002-03-08 2012-08-30 Philera New Zealand Limited Prevention and / or treatment of cardiovascular disease and / or associated heart failure
US20030199581A1 (en) 2002-03-13 2003-10-23 Seligson Allen L. Boswellin compositions enhanced with 3-beta-acetyl-11-keto-beta-boswellic acid ("AKBA") industrial manufacture and uses
US6777392B2 (en) 2002-03-28 2004-08-17 Council Of Scientific And Industrial Research 8-(C-β-D-glucopyranosyl)-7, 3', 4'-trihydroxyflavone, process of isolation thereof, pharmaceutical composition and method for the treatment of diabetes
US20030224077A1 (en) 2002-04-08 2003-12-04 Societe L'oreal S.A. Administration of extracts of nonfruiting nonphotosynthetic filamentous bacteria for increasing the endogenous synthesis of superoxide dismutase
WO2003090681A2 (en) 2002-04-24 2003-11-06 Research Development Foundation SYNERGISTIC EFFECTS OF NUCLEAR TRANSCRIPTION FACTOR NF-κB INHIBITORS AND ANTI-NEOPLASTIC AGENTS
WO2003094833A2 (en) 2002-05-10 2003-11-20 Orchid Chemicals & Pharmaceuticals Limited A new stereoselective route to produce tris-o-substituted-(e)-( 3,5-dihydroxyphenyl)-2-(4- hydroxyphenyl)ethene
WO2003104403A2 (en) 2002-06-07 2003-12-18 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Method of controling acetylation of metabolic enzymes
JP2005533042A (en) 2002-06-10 2005-11-04 オクラホマ　メディカル　リサーチ　ファウンデーション Methods for using linked bis (polyhydroxyphenyl) and its O-alkyl derivatives in the treatment of inflammatory conditions of the central nervous system
DE10230961A1 (en) 2002-07-10 2004-02-12 Lorenz, Peter, Dr. Use of hydroxyresveratrol or a mulberry extract to prepare a neuroprotective agent for preventing or treating diseases of the central and peripheral nervous systems
WO2004009539A2 (en) 2002-07-19 2004-01-29 Orchid Chemicals And Pharmaceuticals Limited Method for the conversion of a z-isomer into e-isomer
CA2421269A1 (en) 2002-08-09 2004-02-09 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Methods and compositions for extending the life span and increasing the stress resistance of cells and organisms
DE10244282A1 (en) * 2002-09-23 2004-04-01 Merck Patent Gmbh Preparation with antioxidant properties
EP1418164A1 (en) 2002-11-07 2004-05-12 Institut National De La Sante Et De La Recherche Medicale (Inserm) New stilbene derivatives and their use as aryl hydrocarbon receptor ligand antagonists
EP1633208A1 (en) * 2003-05-27 2006-03-15 DSM IP Assets B.V. Novel nutraceutical compositions and use thereof
US20070105109A1 (en) 2003-07-02 2007-05-10 Geesaman Bard J Sirt1 and genetic disorders
US20050136429A1 (en) 2003-07-03 2005-06-23 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology SIRT1 modulation of adipogenesis and adipose function
US20050038125A1 (en) 2003-08-15 2005-02-17 Smit Hobbe Friso Method for the treatment of arthritis and pain
US20050049208A1 (en) 2003-09-03 2005-03-03 Kaufmann Doug A. Method of treating and method of preventing diabetes
ES2530972T3 (en) 2003-09-12 2015-03-09 Elixir Pharmaceuticals Inc Methods of treatment of disorders
WO2005053609A2 (en) 2003-11-26 2005-06-16 Guilford Pharmaceuticals Inc. Methods of nad+-dependent deacetylase inhibitors
AU2004312072B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2011-06-23 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions for treating or preventing obesity and insulin resistance disorders
WO2006078941A2 (en) 2005-01-20 2006-07-27 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel sirtuin activating compounds and methods of use thereof
AU2006218404A1 (en) 2005-03-03 2006-09-08 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. N-phenyl benzamide derivatives as sirtuin modulators

Patent Citations (30)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3174901A (en) * 1963-01-31 1965-03-23 Jan Marcel Didier Aron Samuel Process for the oral treatment of diabetes
US4598089A (en) * 1983-06-22 1986-07-01 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Leucine derivatives
US6333441B1 (en) * 1992-03-09 2001-12-25 Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd. Preparation of cis—olefins
US5945109A (en) * 1996-03-29 1999-08-31 S.W. Patentverwertungs Ges.M.B.H. Cosmetic or cosmetic product for firming and smoothing the skin, in particular in the case of cellulite
US6576660B1 (en) * 1997-10-31 2003-06-10 Arch Development Corporation Methods and compositions for regulation of 5-α-reductase activity
US6147121A (en) * 1998-04-10 2000-11-14 Societe L'oreal S.A. Skin toning by stimulating collagen synthesis/proliferation of dermal fibroblasts
US6331633B1 (en) * 1998-05-08 2001-12-18 Calyx Therapeutics Inc. Heterocyclic analogs of diphenylethylene compounds
US6359017B1 (en) * 1999-02-24 2002-03-19 Geza Bruckner Dietary compositions and methods
US6638545B1 (en) * 1999-03-12 2003-10-28 Laboratories Pharmascience Food complement and method for cosmetic treatment based on a grape extract rich in polyphenols
US20010039296A1 (en) * 2000-03-23 2001-11-08 Debasis Bagchi Method and composition for preventing or reducing the symptoms of menopause
US6319523B1 (en) * 2000-06-29 2001-11-20 James H. Zhou Composition and method for inhibiting oral bacteria
US6638543B2 (en) * 2001-02-27 2003-10-28 Regents Of The University Of Michigan Use of natural EGFR inhibitors to prevent side effects due to retinoid therapy, soaps, and other stimuli that activate the epidermal growth factor receptor
US20040209952A1 (en) * 2001-11-01 2004-10-21 Min-Young Kim Composition containing chalcone
US20030190337A1 (en) * 2002-03-28 2003-10-09 The Procter & Gamble Company Methods for regulating the condition of mammalian keratinous tissue via topical application of vitamin B6 compositions
US20040028607A1 (en) * 2002-05-20 2004-02-12 Verdin Eric M. Methods of modulating tubulin deacetylase activity
US20050267023A1 (en) * 2002-08-09 2005-12-01 Sinclair David A Methods and compositions for extending the life span and increasing the stress resistance of cells and organisms
US20040265861A1 (en) * 2003-02-28 2004-12-30 Goldfarb David S Materials and methods for identifying genes and/or agents that alter replicative lifespan
US20060025337A1 (en) * 2003-07-01 2006-02-02 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Sirtuin related therapeutics and diagnostics for neurodegenerative diseases
US20050136537A1 (en) * 2003-07-01 2005-06-23 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions for manipulating the lifespan and stress response of cells and organisms
US20050096256A1 (en) * 2003-07-01 2005-05-05 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions for manipulating the lifespan and stress response of cells and organisms
US20060084135A1 (en) * 2003-07-01 2006-04-20 Howitz Konrad T Compositions for manipulating the lifespan and stress response of cells and organisms
US20060111435A1 (en) * 2003-12-29 2006-05-25 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions for treating or preventing obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US20060002914A1 (en) * 2004-06-04 2006-01-05 Jeffrey Milbrandt Methods and compositions for treating neuropathies
US20060084085A1 (en) * 2004-06-16 2006-04-20 Sinclair David A Methods and compositions for modulating Bax-mediated apoptosis
US20060014705A1 (en) * 2004-06-30 2006-01-19 Howitz Konrad T Compositions and methods for selectively activating human sirtuins
US20060276393A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2006-12-07 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel compositions for preventing and treating neurodegenerative and blood coagulation disorders
US20060276416A1 (en) * 2005-01-20 2006-12-07 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating flushing and drug induced weight gain
US20060229265A1 (en) * 2005-03-30 2006-10-12 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nicotinamide riboside and analogues thereof
US20060257502A1 (en) * 2005-05-11 2006-11-16 Jiankang Liu A combination of mitochondrial nutrients for relieving stress, preventing and improving stress-related disorders
US20070160586A1 (en) * 2005-06-15 2007-07-12 Children's Medical Center Corporation Methods for extending the replicative lifespan of cells

Cited By (83)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7977049B2 (en) 2002-08-09 2011-07-12 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Methods and compositions for extending the life span and increasing the stress resistance of cells and organisms
US9980933B2 (en) 2003-09-15 2018-05-29 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Thyroid hormone analogs and methods of use
US8668926B1 (en) 2003-09-15 2014-03-11 Shaker A. Mousa Nanoparticle and polymer formulations for thyroid hormone analogs, antagonists, and formulations thereof
US9198887B2 (en) 2003-09-15 2015-12-01 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Thyroid hormone analogs and methods of use
US9579300B2 (en) 2003-09-15 2017-02-28 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Nanoparticle and polymer formulations for thyroid hormone analogs, antagonists, and formulations thereof
US9750709B2 (en) 2003-09-15 2017-09-05 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Nanoparticle and polymer formulations for thyroid hormone analogs, antagonists, and formulations thereof
US20090169585A1 (en) * 2003-10-23 2009-07-02 Resveratrol Partners, Llc Resveratrol-Containing Compositions And Their Use In Modulating Gene Product Concentration Or Activity
US20050158376A1 (en) * 2003-10-23 2005-07-21 Sardi William F. Dietary supplement and method of processing same
US8017634B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2011-09-13 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions for treating obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US9597347B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2017-03-21 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions for treating obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US8242171B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2012-08-14 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Method for reducing the weight of a subject or inhibiting weight gain in a subject
US8846724B2 (en) 2003-12-29 2014-09-30 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions for treating obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US8841477B2 (en) 2004-01-20 2014-09-23 Brigham Young University Sirtuin activating compounds and processes for making the same
US20100185006A1 (en) * 2004-01-20 2010-07-22 Brigham Young University Novel sirtuin activating compounds and processes for making the same
US20090117543A1 (en) * 2004-05-04 2009-05-07 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Methods and compositions for inducing sirtuins
US20060084085A1 (en) * 2004-06-16 2006-04-20 Sinclair David A Methods and compositions for modulating Bax-mediated apoptosis
US9499531B2 (en) 2004-07-15 2016-11-22 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US9085531B2 (en) 2004-07-15 2015-07-21 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US8741901B2 (en) 2004-07-15 2014-06-03 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl- and heteroaryl-substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof to block reuptake of norepinephrine, dopamine, and serotonin
US20060276393A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2006-12-07 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel compositions for preventing and treating neurodegenerative and blood coagulation disorders
US20060276416A1 (en) * 2005-01-20 2006-12-07 Sirtris Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating flushing and drug induced weight gain
US20070116788A1 (en) * 2005-01-31 2007-05-24 Kao Corporation Method of enhancing motor function
US20060173070A1 (en) * 2005-01-31 2006-08-03 Kao Corporation Method of enhancing motor function
US20090215681A1 (en) * 2005-02-15 2009-08-27 Joslin Diabetes Center Methods of Diagnosis and Treatment of Metabolic Disorders
US20090142335A1 (en) * 2005-02-15 2009-06-04 Joslin Diabetes Center Methods of diagnosis and treatment of metabolic disorders
US20110142971A1 (en) * 2005-03-14 2011-06-16 Amiot-Carlin Marie-Josephe Use of an onion extract for making a composition to control weight gain
US20080171707A1 (en) * 2005-03-14 2008-07-17 Scalime Nutrition Use Of An Onion Extract For Making A Composition To Control Weight Gain
US20090137681A1 (en) * 2005-04-08 2009-05-28 David A Sinclair Sirtuin Inhibiting Compounds
US9241916B2 (en) 2005-06-14 2016-01-26 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Cognitive performance with sirtuin activators
US7741494B2 (en) 2005-07-14 2010-06-22 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Histone deacetylase inhibitors
US7732475B2 (en) 2005-07-14 2010-06-08 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Histone deacetylase inhibitors
US9498536B2 (en) 2005-09-15 2016-11-22 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Method and composition of thyroid hormone analogues and nanoformulations thereof for treating anti-inflammatory disorders
US10130686B2 (en) 2005-09-15 2018-11-20 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Method and composition of thyroid hormone analogues and nanoformulations thereof for treating inflammatory disorders
US20120258069A1 (en) * 2005-09-16 2012-10-11 Maria Alexander-Bridges Rgd-binding compounds and methods of use
US9272049B2 (en) * 2005-09-16 2016-03-01 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Methods of stimulating fat mobilization using a polymer conjugated polyphenol
US20100209382A1 (en) * 2005-09-16 2010-08-19 Ordway Research Institute, Inc. Polyphenol Conjugates as RGD-Binding Compounds and Methods of Use
JP2007228855A (en) * 2006-02-28 2007-09-13 Univ Of Tokushima Method for screening antiobestic agent
US20080014583A1 (en) * 2006-06-08 2008-01-17 The Salk Institute For Biological Studies Methods for identifying candidate fat-mobilizing agents
US8389207B2 (en) 2006-06-08 2013-03-05 Salk Institute For Biological Studies Methods for identifying candidate fat-mobilizing agents
WO2007146654A1 (en) * 2006-06-08 2007-12-21 The Salk Institute For Biological Studies Methods for identifying candidate fat-mobilizing agents
US9289395B2 (en) 2006-12-22 2016-03-22 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Nanoparticle and polymer formulations for thyroid hormone analogs, antagonists, and formulations and uses thereof
US20110142941A1 (en) * 2006-12-22 2011-06-16 Davis Paul J Nanoparticle and Polymer Formulations for Thyroid Hormone Analogs, Antagonists, and Formulations and Uses Thereof
US20100047177A1 (en) * 2007-01-26 2010-02-25 Washington University Methods and compositions for treating neuropathies
CN101371837A (en) * 2007-08-21 2009-02-25 中国科学院上海生命科学研究院 Uses of B vitamins nicotinic amide in regulating body weight, blood sugar and insulin sensibility
US20110082189A1 (en) * 2007-10-23 2011-04-07 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Use of compounds activating sirt-3 for mimicking exercise
US9498476B2 (en) 2008-06-04 2016-11-22 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Crystalline form of 6-[(4S)-2-methyl-4-(2-naphthyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl]pyridazin-3-amine
CN105832717A (en) * 2008-07-25 2016-08-10 爱默蕾大学 Treatment of various disorders with 7,8-dihydroxyflavone and derivatives thereof
US20100112099A1 (en) * 2008-11-04 2010-05-06 Metaproteomics, Llc Phytochemical compositions and methods for activating amp-kinase
US20100159021A1 (en) * 2008-12-23 2010-06-24 Paul Davis Small Molecule Ligands of the Integrin RGD Recognition Site and Methods of Use
US20100255108A1 (en) * 2009-03-31 2010-10-07 Hung-Yun Lin Combination Treatment of Cancer With Cetuximab and Tetrac
US20120041070A1 (en) * 2009-03-31 2012-02-16 Shengfang Jin Methods of treating cancer having an aberrant egfr or kras genotype
US9180107B2 (en) 2009-03-31 2015-11-10 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Combination treatment of cancer with cetuximab and tetrac
US8815894B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2014-08-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline forms of (S)-7-([1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyridin-6-yl)-4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline and use thereof
US9173879B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2015-11-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystalline forms of (S)-7-([1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a ]pyridin-6-yl)-4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline and use thereof
US9034899B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2015-05-19 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycle substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof
US8802696B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2014-08-12 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. 7-([1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyridin-6-yl)-4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoqu inoli and use thereof
US20100292243A1 (en) * 2009-05-12 2010-11-18 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. 7-([1,2,4]TRIAZOLO[1,5-a]PYRIDIN-6-YL)-4-(3,4-DICHLOROPHENYL)-1,2,3,4-TETRAHYDROISOQUINOLINE AND USE THEREOF
US9604960B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2017-03-28 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycle substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof
US20100292242A1 (en) * 2009-05-12 2010-11-18 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycle substituted tetrahydroisoquinolines and use thereof
US20100292250A1 (en) * 2009-05-12 2010-11-18 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. CRYSTALLINE FORMS OF (S)-7-([1,2,4]TRIAZOLO[1,5-a]PYRIDIN-6-YL)-4-(3,4-DICHLOROPHENYL)-1,2,3,4- TETRAHYDROISOQUINOLINE AND USE THEREOF
US9220788B2 (en) 2009-06-17 2015-12-29 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Nanoparticle and polymer formulations for thyroid hormone analogs, antagonists, and formulations and uses thereof
US9839614B2 (en) 2009-06-17 2017-12-12 Nanopharmaceuticals, Llc Nanoparticle and polymer formulations for thyroid hormone analogs, antagonists, and formulations and uses thereof
US20110052715A1 (en) * 2009-06-17 2011-03-03 Davis Paul J Nanoparticle and polymer formulations for thyroid hormone analogs, antagonists, and formulations and uses thereof
WO2010151625A1 (en) * 2009-06-25 2010-12-29 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods for treating and diagnosing glucose metabolic syndrome
US8802240B2 (en) 2011-01-06 2014-08-12 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Uses of formulations of thyroid hormone analogs and nanoparticulate forms thereof to increase chemosensitivity and radiosensitivity in tumor or cancer cells
TWI417088B (en) * 2011-08-10 2013-12-01 Univ Kaohsiung Medical Composition for treating diabetes and metabolic diseases and a preparation method thereof
US9226937B2 (en) 2011-11-16 2016-01-05 Resveratrol Partners, Llc Compositions containing resveratrol and nucleotides
US8916528B2 (en) 2011-11-16 2014-12-23 Resveratrol Partners, Llc Compositions containing resveratrol and nucleotides
US9877981B2 (en) 2012-10-09 2018-01-30 President And Fellows Of Harvard College NAD biosynthesis and precursors for the treatment and prevention of cancer and proliferation
US8907108B2 (en) 2012-10-26 2014-12-09 Industrial Technology Research Institute P-type organic semiconductor material and optoelectronic device utilizing the same
WO2014138426A2 (en) * 2013-03-07 2014-09-12 Topokine Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for reducing body fat and adipocytes
WO2014138426A3 (en) * 2013-03-07 2014-10-30 Topokine Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for reducing body fat and adipocytes
KR101402921B1 (en) * 2013-08-28 2014-06-02 전남대학교산학협력단 Use of resveratol derivatives for treating obesity or type 2 diabetes
US10201616B2 (en) 2016-06-07 2019-02-12 Nanopharmaceuticals, Llc Non-cleavable polymer conjugated with αVβ3 integrin thyroid antagonists
US10695436B2 (en) 2016-06-07 2020-06-30 Nanopharmaceuticals, Llc Non-cleavable polymer conjugated with alpha V beta 3 integrin thyroid antagonists
US20190224122A1 (en) * 2016-09-23 2019-07-25 Delpor, Inc. Stable compositions for incretin mimetic compounds
US10328043B1 (en) 2018-04-11 2019-06-25 Nanopharmaceuticals, Llc. Composition and method for dual targeting in treatment of neuroendocrine tumors
US11077082B2 (en) 2018-04-11 2021-08-03 Nanopharmaceuticals, Llc Composition and method for dual targeting in treatment of neuroendocrine tumors
US11351137B2 (en) 2018-04-11 2022-06-07 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Composition and method for dual targeting in treatment of neuroendocrine tumors
US10568352B1 (en) * 2018-10-25 2020-02-25 Wiser Concepts, LLC Nutritional compositions and methods of treatment therewith
US10961204B1 (en) 2020-04-29 2021-03-30 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Composition of scalable thyrointegrin antagonists with improved blood brain barrier penetration and retention into brain tumors
US11186551B2 (en) 2020-04-29 2021-11-30 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Composition of scalable thyrointegrin antagonists with improved retention in tumors
US11723888B2 (en) 2021-12-09 2023-08-15 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Polymer conjugated thyrointegrin antagonists

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2005065667A3 (en) 2008-01-17
US8242171B2 (en) 2012-08-14
AU2004312072B2 (en) 2011-06-23
CA2548671A1 (en) 2005-07-21
CN101247793A (en) 2008-08-20
CN101247793B (en) 2013-04-10
WO2005065667A2 (en) 2005-07-21
AU2004312072A1 (en) 2005-07-21
CA2548671C (en) 2015-02-24
US20100316679A1 (en) 2010-12-16
JP2007527418A (en) 2007-09-27
EP1708689A2 (en) 2006-10-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8242171B2 (en) Method for reducing the weight of a subject or inhibiting weight gain in a subject
US9597347B2 (en) Compositions for treating obesity and insulin resistance disorders
US20200046741A1 (en) Small molecule cd38 inhibitors and methods of using same
US20060276416A1 (en) Methods and compositions for treating flushing and drug induced weight gain
US9241916B2 (en) Cognitive performance with sirtuin activators
AU2006204699B2 (en) Novel compositions for preventing and treating neurodegenerative and blood coagulation disorders
EP2362226A1 (en) Diagnostic method for neurodegenerative diseases based on measurement of SIRT1 levels or activity

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE, MASSACHU

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SINCLAIR, DAVID A.;REEL/FRAME:016019/0969

Effective date: 20050329

AS Assignment

Owner name: GENERAL HOSPITAL CORPORATION, THE, MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:ALEXANDER-BRIDGES, MARIA;REEL/FRAME:017786/0367

Effective date: 20060608

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

AS Assignment

Owner name: NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (DHHS), U.S. GOVERNMENT, MARYLAND

Free format text: CONFIRMATORY LICENSE;ASSIGNOR:HARVARD UNIVERSITY;REEL/FRAME:056629/0048

Effective date: 20210112